JP2020049260A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of monitoring a fraudulent game.SOLUTION: A game area where a game ball can flow down is provided. Shooting means causes the game ball to pass through the shooting path and to be shot toward the game area. First detection means capable of detecting a shot ball and second detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has flowed backward in the shooting path without reaching the game area among the shot balls are provided. Satisfaction of a predetermined condition is determined, based on the detection results of the first detection means and the second detection means. Information is output based on the determination of a predetermined condition.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area, and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. ing.

JP 2007-252627 A

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that an illegal game in which a privilege is obtained in an amount equal to or greater than the number of gaming balls fired by the firing device is performed.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of monitoring illegal games.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a game area in which a game ball can flow down, a firing means capable of firing the game ball toward the game area, and a firing fired by the firing means. A firing path having a path capable of guiding a ball to the game area, first detection means capable of detecting the fired ball, and, among the fired balls, the fired path has flowed back before reaching the game area. A second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, a determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a detection result of the first detecting means and a detection result of the second detecting means, and the predetermined condition is determined by the determining means. Output means for outputting information based on the establishment.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the predetermined condition is such that the second detecting means determines whether the first detecting means does not detect a gaming ball. Is detected.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising: clocking means capable of measuring a predetermined time; and clocking start means for starting clocking by the clocking means. It is to judge that the predetermined condition has been satisfied within a predetermined time from the start of timing by the timing start means.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the third aspect, the timing start means starts timing when the second detection means detects a game ball. The second detection means has detected a game ball during a predetermined time measured by the time measurement means.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, among the gaming balls fired by the firing means, the game device has a backflow in the firing path before reaching the gaming area. Guide means for guiding a game ball from the launch path to a specific area is provided, and the second detection means is provided in the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effects can be obtained. That is, among the shooting balls and the shooting balls, a game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path before reaching the game area is detected, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Information based on the fact can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be monitored that the illegal game has been performed based on the output information.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the first aspect, even if the gaming ball is not fired, of the fired balls, the game ball that has flown backward in the firing path before reaching the game area is played. There is an effect that it is possible to monitor a fraudulent game in which a ball is detected.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the first or second aspect, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination is made in consideration of the time difference between the timing of detecting the shooting ball fired by the firing means and the timing of detecting the shooting ball as flowing backward through the shooting path before the shooting ball reaches the game area. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect of the third aspect, there is no need to perform a normal clock, and there is an effect that unnecessary processing can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect of any one of the first to fourth aspects, there is an effect that only a foul ball can be reliably detected.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame and the lower plate unit were removed. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the pachinko machine in FIG. 2. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the state in which the illegal game in FIG. 3 is performed. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value, and (b) is the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 and a hit in a normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probable variation). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a variable and a variation type. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an external output process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the incoming-ball abnormality determination process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 5th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 6th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing typically contents of RAM of a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows launch control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a foul ball entry path 606, FIG. 4 is an operation explanatory diagram when a threaded game ball enters the foul ball entry path 606, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 2) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail 801 and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 having a function of storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, lending balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and a ball supplied to the upper plate 17 is supplied by the inclination so that the ball is supplied to the ball launching unit 112a. (Not shown), and is guided to the supply ball firing unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. And an operation amount detection switch 51c formed by the above. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (the detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) changes in accordance with the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor (the detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) that changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, whereby a jump corresponding to the operation of the player is performed. A ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 by the amount. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is disposed on a rail mounting portion provided on the inner frame 12, and at an inner position of the outer rail 62 Similarly to the outer rail 62, an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a band-shaped metal plate is erected. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The firing area 701 will be described with reference to FIG. The firing area 701 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (partly including the guide member 605) in the left-right direction, and in the front-rear direction by the front surface of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). This is an area, which is a substantially arc-shaped path formed on the left side of the game area with the inner rail 61 therebetween.

  The outer rail 62 is made of a long metal band made of stainless steel, and is mounted on a rail mounting portion formed of a resin (polycarbonate containing fluorine having low frictional resistance) disposed on the inner frame 12. . In particular, the surface facing the inner rail at a predetermined interval is formed of a single metal band, and when the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a passes through the firing path, the metal band The contact is made at the seam so that the launch direction and launch intensity are not affected.

  The outer rail 62 may be planted on the game board 13 similarly to the inner rail 61.

  The launch path 701 is provided to guide game balls fired from a ball launch unit provided in the lower plate unit 15 of the inner frame 12 from above the game board 13 to the game area. A gap 802 is formed between the start end of the firing path 701 and the end of the above-described firing rail 801, and the game ball that has fallen into the gap 802 flows down a foul ball path 800 b described later to the upper plate 17. Is returned. On the other hand, the end of the firing path formed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 has a first opening 603 communicating with the game area, and the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is the first ball. It passes through the opening 603 and reaches the game area.

  The passage width of the firing path 701 has an interval that allows two game balls to pass at the start end, and is formed so as to gradually narrow toward a position where the game ball passes through the guide member 605. At the position where the game ball passes, the width of the passage is narrowed to allow one game ball to pass. Then, after passing through the guide member 605, the width of the game ball is widened again so as to allow two balls to pass therethrough, and is gradually narrowed again toward the end portion from there. The reason why the passage width is reduced at the position where the guide member 605 passes will be described later.

  In the vicinity of the first opening 603, a return ball preventing member 68 is attached. The return ball preventing member 68 prevents the ball guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. The launching path 701 is provided with a second opening 604 serving as an opening of a foul ball entering ball passage 606 described later, and a launching ball detection switch 208b for detecting a game ball passing through the launching path 701. . A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. An arc connecting the rails is provided on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, and is fixed by a resin arc member 70. Have been.

  The ball launching unit 112a is a unitized mechanism that launches a game ball supplied from the upper plate 17 toward a game area provided on the game board 13. The ball firing unit 122a is composed of members such as a firing solenoid, a firing rail 801, a ball feed mechanism, and a positioning member, and is assembled to a base plate formed by pressing a metal flat plate. The base plate on which the members are assembled is fixed to the inner frame 12 with screws.

  If the mounting position of each member constituting the ball launching unit 112a and the mounting position of the ball launching unit 112a to the inner frame have a slight error for each pachinko machine 10, the launch angle of the game ball to the game board 13 and Since the firing intensities differ, high-precision mounting is required. Therefore, the base plate is provided with a fastening hole for attaching each member and a boss for fixing the position of each member, thereby enabling highly accurate attachment. Further, a plurality of (six) screw holes for attaching the base plate to the inner frame are provided, and the base plate can be attached to the inner frame with high accuracy.

  The firing solenoid has a unit configuration in which a linear solenoid is housed in a case member. The firing solenoid is provided with a metal plunger disposed in parallel with the firing rail 801 in the longitudinal direction, and a resin cap that covers the tip of the plunger. As the material of the cap, a polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is employed in the present embodiment. While the player rotates the operation handle 51, the firing solenoid repeats excitation and non-excitation every predetermined time (0.6 seconds), and the plunger reappears correspondingly. . When the plunger protrudes, the game ball positioned on the firing rail 801 by the positioning member described later is fired obliquely upward toward the firing rail. Note that a variable resistor that is linked to the operation handle 51 is connected to the firing solenoid, and the projecting speed of the plunger is adjusted based on the amount of operation of the operation handle 51, so that the firing speed of the game ball and, consequently, the flying distance of the operation handle 51 are controlled. It is adjusted by the amount of rotation.

  The firing rail guides the game ball immediately after being fired by the firing solenoid, and has a predetermined firing angle (20 degrees) so that the game ball is fired toward a firing area 701 provided on the front surface of the game board 13. It had. The firing rail is formed in an M-shaped cross section, and has a shape in which the variation of the game balls is suppressed by passing the game balls through the central groove. Further, in order to suppress variation in game balls and supply more stable game balls to the launch area 701, the length of the launch rail 801 reaches from the launch solenoid mounting position to the upper end of the area covered by the lower plate unit 15. 100 mm. A gap 802, which will be described later, is provided between the end of the firing rail 801 and the firing area 701.

  The ball feed mechanism sends out game balls continuously supplied from the upper plate 17 to the starting end of the firing rail 801 one by one. This ball feed mechanism is mounted on a base plate so as to cover the firing solenoid, and includes a metal piece and an electromagnet for attracting the metal piece inside, and the metal piece is excited by the electromagnet. Has a mechanism that moves upward and moves downward by its own weight when the electromagnet is de-energized. The mechanism is provided with an accommodating portion capable of accommodating one game ball supplied from the upper plate 17 while the metal piece is moving upward. When the electromagnet is de-energized and the metal piece moves downward due to its own weight, the above-described housing communicates with the guide path to the firing rail 801, and the game balls housed in the housing are directed toward the firing rail 801. It flows down.

  The positioning member supports a game ball placed on the starting end of the firing rail 801 and can slightly change the firing position of the game ball. The positioning member is a cylindrical member attached to the base plate by an eccentric shaft, and the distance between the positioning member and the firing rail can be changed by rotating the cylindrical member around the eccentric shaft. It has a configuration that can be used.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to these jackpot types (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. And at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided. In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit). After that, in the “big hit A”, the pachinko machine 10 is given a special symbol high probability state (special symbol change state) from the end of the big hit until the next big hit occurs as an added value after the big hit. You. On the other hand, in "Big hit B", as a value added after the end of the big hit, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set short. Time saving state is given.

  Here, the “special symbol high probability state” refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed). In other words, the special game state (16R) It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to (jackpot). On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (ordinary symbol time reduction period) means that the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the fluctuation time is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is reduced. This is a game state in which a ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64, which is long and the number of times of opening is large. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  Thereafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the period from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot occurs, is referred to as the special symbol change period. Call it. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol from the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the predetermined number of lottery (100 times) of the special symbol, It is usually called the time reduction period of the design (it is also simply called the time reduction period). In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the number of lotteries of the special symbol is used to indicate the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 100, it is described that the time reduction period of the normal symbol is 100 times.

  The number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” is completed, the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set. ".

  Further, the duration of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the jackpot type becomes “Big Jackpot A”, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol continues after the “Big Jackpot A” ends and the lottery of the special symbol ends 30 times. After the end, the normal symbol time saving state may be continued until the special symbol lottery ends 60 times. Further, instead of the number of lotteries of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an initial setting is performed by turning on a power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to the “high probability state of special symbol”.

  When the special symbol hits and shifts from the "normal state of the ordinary symbol" to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol", the state is that the lottery of the special symbol is repeated (100 times) after the end of the special symbol jackpot. Times) until the end. On the other hand, after the special symbol hits, if the new special symbol hit does not occur by the time the special symbol lottery for the number of working hours ends, the process returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”. As described above, the number of time savings is determined according to the special jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is “big hit B”, the predetermined number is 100 times.

  Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly obtained while the "normal symbol time reduction state" is continued, the "normal symbol time reduction state" is further changed after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. It continues until the lottery of the special symbol for the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type ends. For example, after the "big hit B" and the transition to the "normal pattern time reduction state", when the "10" special symbol lottery becomes "big hit B", the "normal pattern time reduction state" is further changed to the "big hit B" After the end, the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times. That is, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly obtained while the “normal symbol time reduction state” is continued, each time the special symbol jackpot type is changed according to the new special symbol jackpot type (“ The duration of the "normal symbol time-saving state" is updated.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (spot jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" other than "7" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower two parts, the lower two-thirds being a main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the other upper one-third being a notice effect, The sub-display area Ds displays a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), a lottery of a special symbol is performed using the trigger as a trigger, and thereafter, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Symbol) is executed. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol according to the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37. Display is performed.

  When the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the high-speed variation display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). , The display is switched to the medium speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further to the low speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are aligned is performed, the variable effect ends, and subsequently, a big hit effect is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, if the main symbol (the third symbol) of the same number is not displayed, a stop display is performed, and the variable effect is completed. The next special symbol is drawn, and the next variable effect is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which an opening effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The opening effect is to increase the expectation of the player by notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state and informs the player of the game value (usually the time-saving period of the symbol) which is given to the player after the end of the big hit (displays the time-short period). Or, it is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the held special symbol lottery (performing a fixed effect display). In the ending production, the fact that the player is notified of the game value (normally, the time reduction period of the symbol) is referred to as "time reduction display", and the lottery result in the lottery of the reserved special symbol is a big hit. The fact that this is notified to the player is referred to as “determined effect display”.

  When a jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, the main controller 110 controls the sound lamp control in synchronization with the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. An opening command is transmitted to the device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the opening effect is started following the variable effect.

  Next, the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the first round to the audio ramp controller 113 at the timing when the opening effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started following the opening effect. In the present embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), the specific winning opening 65a is closed. At the same time, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached, and the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the second round to the audio ramp controller 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, the opening and closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. Thereafter, each time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new round number is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Done. Thereby, each round effect from the first round to the 16th round is executed in order.

  Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is completed 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, an ending effect is started. As described above, in the ending effect, the end of the special game state is notified to the player, and the time reduction display is performed (the game value (normally, the time reduction period of the symbol) given to the player after the end of the big hit). Or a confirmed effect display is performed (the player is notified that the lottery result in the lottery of the reserved special symbol will be a big hit). In the ending effect, whether "short time display" or "fixed effect display" is performed depends on the type of jackpot of the special symbol this time, the type of jackpot of the reserved special symbol, the value of a counter not shown, etc. Is selected based on

  When “reduced time display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, “100 chances” (period) is displayed on the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Example of information) is displayed. This screen is displayed when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is "big hit B". From the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, the normal symbol time reduction state Is continued. When this screen is displayed, the player can easily recognize the period during which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued (the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol).

  It should be noted that the longer the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol is, the greater the chance of the ball passing through the second entrance 67, so that the chance of the lottery of the ordinary symbol being performed and the opportunity of being hit with the ordinary symbol are also increased. More. Therefore, the chance of opening a motorized accessory as a jackpot of a normal symbol increases, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, so that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the first entrance is opened. When the ball entrance 64 becomes easy to enter, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which the special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the condition. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, when “determined effect display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, “Super chance!” (An example of another information) is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. . This screen means that the lottery result will always be a big hit if any of the lotteries of the reserved special symbols is performed. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that a special symbol jackpot will be won in the held special symbol lottery, so that the player expects that the special symbol jackpot will surely be obtained. Can be held. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (a second symbol) according to a lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label or the like is provided. It can be seen through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Next, the passage forming member 800 provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. The passage forming member 800 includes a unit base that is assembled to the inner frame 12 and a unit cover that is assembled to the lower plate unit 15. By closing the lower plate unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 12, a game ball is formed. It is formed in a state where a passage width that allows one ball to pass is secured. With this configuration, even if a ball is clogged in the passage forming member 800, the inside of the passage can be easily inspected only by opening the lower plate unit 15 from the inner frame 12. When adopting a configuration in which a ball passage is formed by closing a plurality of members as described above, the passage surface through which the game ball passes through one member and the other surface constituting the passage in the other member In this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the joint of each member when the game ball passes through the ball passage and the ball flow from becoming unstable. In the present embodiment, since the inside of the passage can be easily inspected even in a complicated ball passage, the unit base and the unit cover are each molded with a resin molded product (polycarbonate).

  Note that the passage forming member 800 does not need to be entirely configured as described above, and may be a part of a spherical passage. Further, it is only necessary that the unit base and the unit cover can be assembled to form a ball passage, and the unit cover may be attached to the unit base.

  The passage forming member 800 has a lower plate discharge passage 800a for discharging game balls to the lower plate 50 when the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1) is full, and a lower reach or a temporary play region. , And a ball ball switch 800b for discharging a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as a foul ball) that has reentered the firing path 701 after colliding with a nail or the like to the upper plate 17, and a ball release switch (not shown). A shooting ball discharge passage 800c for discharging the game balls on the shooting rail 801 to the lower plate 50 at the time of the ball removing operation for operating the game ball is formed. The passage forming member 800 integrally forms the lower plate discharge passage 800a, the foul sphere passage 800b, and the firing sphere discharge passage 800c, so that each passage is formed by a separate member. It is possible to simplify the parts cost, to reduce the number of parts to reduce the assembly cost, or to make the parts compact to facilitate the layout of other parts. Further, since a plurality of passages are collectively molded with resin, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the positional relationship between the passages.

  In particular, since the merging portion where the game ball flowing down the lower plate discharge passage 800a and the game ball flowing down the firing ball discharge passage 800c merge is also resin molded in advance, the game ball flowing down the lower plate discharge passage 800a has priority. As a result, it is possible to reliably and easily realize a configuration of flowing down to the lower plate discharge port 50a from above the firing ball discharge passage 800c so as to flow down to the lower plate.

  A gap 802 of about 40 mm is formed between the firing rail 801 and a firing path 701 formed by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 on the front of the game board 13 so as to receive a foul ball dropped from the gap. Is provided with a foul ball passage 800b. The foul ball received in foul ball passage 800b is discharged to upper plate 17 from upper plate discharge port 17a.

  At the right end of the passage forming member 800, a shooting ball discharge passage 800c that is a passage of a game ball connecting the downstream side of the firing rail 801 and the lower plate discharge port 50a is formed. A shutter mechanism (not shown) that can be opened and closed is provided at the entrance of the shooting ball discharge passage 800c, and the shutter mechanism is opened by operating a ball release switch (not shown) provided on the upper plate 17. The game balls located on the shooting rail are discharged to the shooting ball discharge passage 800c and returned to the lower plate 50.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the foul ball passage 800b are configured to be guided to the upper plate 17, but may be directly guided to the ball firing unit 112a instead of the upper plate 17. By doing so, even if a foul ball occurs, it can be fired again quickly.

  Next, among the firing paths 701 provided in the game board 13, the configuration near the foul ball entering ball passage 606 provided on the lower left side of the firing path 701 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The foul ball entering ball passage 606 is a passage through which a foul ball flows, and the width direction is defined by the outer rail 62, the guide member 605, and the entering ball passage forming member 607 erected on the game board 13. , A passage whose front and rear surfaces are defined by the glass unit 16. This is a space in which game balls branched from the launch path 701 by the second opening 604 flow down. The foul ball that has flowed down in the foul ball entrance passage 606 enters the foul winning opening 601 provided in the passage. As described above, since the glass unit 16 forms the front surface of the foul ball entering ball passage 606, the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed. In addition, by opening the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached, inspection inside the passage can be easily performed.

  The second opening 604 is formed between the outer rail 62 and the guide member 605 that constitute the outer peripheral side of the firing path 701 formed in an arc shape. The second opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side of a region (hereinafter, referred to as a lower left chord region) where the firing sphere is fired to the upper left in the firing path 701, that is, when the foul sphere flows down by its own weight. (Hereinafter referred to as a lower left chord position). The reason why the second opening 604 is provided at the lower left chord position is that a foul ball generated near the end of the firing path 701 can enter the second opening 604 by its own weight. In the case where the second opening 604 is provided near the end of the firing path 701, that is, in a region where the fired game balls move to the upper right (hereinafter, referred to as a left upper chord region), the foul ball flows down by its own weight. The position where the contact is made is on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701 (the inner rail 61) (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord position). In the present embodiment, the firing path 701 has a left arc shape so as to fire the game ball toward the upper left side. However, even in the case of adopting an arc configuration other than the present embodiment, the foul ball is By providing the second opening 604 on the side that comes into contact with its own weight, it is possible to easily enter a foul ball.

  Next, a configuration near the second opening 604 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a region II in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. A guide member 602 for guiding a foul ball to the second opening is provided on the guide member 605 side (the right side in FIG. 3) of the second opening 604. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member (urethane), and its mounting base 602a is fixed to the game board 13 with screws. Since the mounting base 602a is covered with the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605, the game ball does not collide. The guide member 602 extends to about half of the firing path 701 in the width direction to receive the foul ball, and prevents the foul ball from flowing down to the start end of the firing path 701. Further, the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and then comes into contact with the guide member 602, but the tip of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is guided by the guide member. Since the protection portion is formed so as to cover the mounting base portion 602a of the guide member 602, the tip of the guide member 602 contacts the shot game ball. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member, and elastically deforms in a direction in which a tip portion of the guide member 602 comes into the foul ball entering ball passage 606 when it comes into contact with a game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (dotted line in FIG. 3). (Refer to the figure), and a state is obtained in which a part of the second opening 604 is covered. In this state, the guide member 602 faces the second opening, and the opening width of the second opening 604 is reduced.

  Therefore, when the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a passes near the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is elastically deformed, so that the firing force does not drop significantly. In addition, since the opening width of the second opening 604 is reduced by the elastic deformation of the guide member, it is possible to smoothly fire without falling into the second opening. Then, after the shot game ball passes, the guide member 602 elastically returns to the original position.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where the guide member 602 collides with a foul ball. The guide member 602 is configured such that the tip end protrudes toward the firing path 701 side from a straight line connecting the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and the inclined surface start end of the outer rail 62. The outer rail 62 and the second opening 604 are formed such that an extension of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 toward the second opening 604 is directed toward the second opening 604. In such a location, the foul ball flowing down from the outer rail 62 enters the second opening 604 by following one of the following routes.

  When invading the second opening 604 without coming into contact with the guide member 602, the flow rate of the foul ball is reduced by the protruding part 605a for preventing the foul winning opening 601 from reaching the foul winning opening 601 with the momentum. The winning opening 601 is reached. On the other hand, when the guide member enters the second opening after coming into contact with the guide member 602, the guide member is elastically deformed in a direction to enter the firing path 701 by an external force received from a foul ball. After the falling speed of the foul ball is reduced by this elastic deformation, the ball reaches the foul winning opening 601.

  Note that even if the guide member 602 is elastically deformed in a direction in which the guide member 602 enters the firing path 701 due to an external force received from the foul ball, the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605 limits the change of the guide member 602. The launching path 701 is not blocked by the external force received, and the guide member is provided only to the extent that the opening width of the second opening 604 is widened (to the extent that the gap between the guide member 602 and the protection portion 605b in FIG. 3 is eliminated). Only 602 is elastically deformed. Even in such an elastically deformed state, the path width of the launch path 701 immediately after passing the guide member 605 so that the game balls fired by the ball launch unit 112a can pass the launch path 701 is such that two game balls pass. The width is possible.

  By using such a configuration, it is possible to achieve both the function of receiving the foul ball and guiding it to the foul ball entrance path 606 and the function of smoothly passing the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. Becomes Furthermore, since the elastic deformation of the guide member 602 is restricted by using the guide member 605 which is a separate member from the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is moved in one direction (the direction in which the guide member 602 enters the ball passage 606). It is possible to eliminate the necessity of using a complicated technique such as using a material that is easy to change and hard to change in the other direction (the direction that blocks the firing path).

  In addition, the guide member 602 is not limited to the above-described configuration, as long as it has a function of guiding a foul ball to the second opening without blocking a game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. For example, for example, a spring configuration is used in which the mounting base 602a is rotatable and can return to the origin position, and a variable configuration in which the mounting base 602a supports the plate-like member, or a rotating body that can rotate only in the game ball firing direction is used. Configuration may be used.

  In addition, any configuration that does not change may be used as long as it has the above-described function. For example, by providing a guiding passage that gradually tapers along the firing direction of the shooting sphere, the foul ball flows down to the ball firing unit 112a side. It is good also as a structure which prevents that. In this embodiment, urethane is used as the elastic member. However, any material having excellent rebound resilience may be used, and other rubbers (such as silicon rubber) may be used. Further, the mounting position of the guide member 602 may be on the inner rail 61 side.

  In the foul ball entrance passage 606, a projection 605 c integrally formed with the guide member 605 is provided so as to cover the foul winning opening 601, which will be described later in detail. It prevents a violent collision.

  The foul ball that has flowed down the foul ball entrance passage 606 enters the foul winning opening 601 and flows down a collection passage (not shown) in the same manner as the game ball that has won another winning opening. It is discharged to an out port (not shown) provided on the back surface. The foul winning switch 208a detects a foul ball that has entered the foul winning opening 601. The detection result is based on the award ball payout process (not shown) and the abnormal ball entry determination process (S1004 in FIG. 23) described later. Used for

  The fired ball detection switch 208b is a proximity switch that detects a game ball that has passed through the fired path 701, and the detection result is used in a later-described incoming ball abnormality determination process (S1004 in FIG. 23). The fired ball detection switch 208b is provided near the guide member 602 at a position where the fired ball can be detected and the foul ball does not flow backward.

  By setting the shooting ball detection switch 208b as a switch that can also detect the direction in which the game ball passes, it is determined whether the detected game ball is a game ball that has been fired or a foul ball that has flowed back through the firing path 701. Therefore, the mounting position of the shooting ball detection switch 208b can be set freely. The switch capable of detecting the passing direction of the game ball includes a passage portion through which the game ball passes in a line, and a plurality of detection portions provided along the passing direction of the game ball. ) May be detected to detect the direction in which the game ball passes, and specifically, a technology that detects a change in a magnetic field and an electric signal corresponding to the change in the magnetic field may be considered.

  In the present embodiment, the foul sphere entrance ball passage 606 is configured to be at an acute angle with respect to the launch path 701. This is a configuration for performing a countermeasure against the flow of the game ball in the firing path 701 and the foul winning opening 601 and will be described later in detail.

  Here, the flow of the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls on the firing rail 801 and jumps over the gap 802 with its momentum and rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605. Thereafter, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 and returns along the outer rail 62 to the game area via the first opening 603 where the ball preventing member 68 is provided. It is launched.

  Among the game balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a, the flow of the foul sphere differs depending on the location where the foul sphere is generated. When a foul ball is generated on the end side of the firing path 701, the ball is guided into the foul ball entrance path 606 by the guiding member 602, and enters the foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entrance path. Although the details will be described later, the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) based on the ball entering the foul winning opening 601 is set to one ball, and the payout control is performed based on the game ball entering the foul winning opening 601. A game ball is paid out to the upper bowl 17 from the device 111.

  On the other hand, the foul sphere generated at the start end side of the firing path 701, specifically, at the start end side of the firing path 701 from the second opening 604 serving as a branch port to the foul ball entrance path 606 falls into the gap 802. Then, it is returned to the upper plate 17 via the foul ball passage 800b.

  In the present embodiment, the foul ball is branched by the second opening 604 or the gap 802, and the ball is supplied to the upper plate 17, so that the player can play the game based on the generation of the foul ball. Since the ball is supplied to the upper plate, it can be fired again as it is. Further, since two structures (the second opening 604 and the gap 802) for branching the foul sphere are provided at different positions of the firing path 701, the foul sphere is emitted on the side closer to the location where the foul sphere is generated. , The period during which the foul sphere stays in the launch path 701 can be shortened as compared with the case where there is only one configuration for branching the foul sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a vicious circle in which a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a collides with a foul ball staying in the firing path 701 and a new foul ball is generated.

  Furthermore, since the foul sphere entrance path 606 is used as a configuration for branching the foul sphere from the launch path on the game board 13, the foul sphere is returned from the game board 13 side to the front frame 14 as in the related art. It is not necessary to provide a passage for the above. Therefore, the limited space in the gaming machine on the front frame side can be effectively utilized as a space for installing other members (for example, decorative members and frame buttons). In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated foul ball passage on the game board 13 side so as to communicate with the front frame 14 side, the degree of design freedom of the game board 13 is increased, and a pachinko machine that can enhance the interest for the player. 10 can be provided.

  Here, a characteristic configuration of each member provided near the firing path 701 will be described. The angle of inclination on the firing rail 801 is designed so that the game ball reaches above the lowermost end of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 so that the shot game ball jumps over the gap 802 without fail (approximately). 20 degrees). The inclination angle of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is designed to be steeper (about 30 degrees) than the inclined angle on the firing rail 801. The gap 802 is located on the extension line of the inclined surface 605a in the flowing direction. Therefore, the foul ball flowing down on the guide member 605 falls into the gap 802. Further, it is designed so that the shooting sphere rolling on the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604. Specifically, the extension line A (see FIG. 4) extending the inclined surface 605 a in the firing direction reaches the upper side from the lower end of the outer rail 62.

  In addition, it is designed so that the second opening 604 faces the extension of the lower end of the outer rail 62. Therefore, it is configured that the foul ball flowing down along the outer rail 62 surely falls into the second opening 604. In other words, the foul ball entering path 606 is formed at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launch direction (rolling direction) of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605, and the falling direction of the foul ball flowing down along the outer rail 62. On the other hand, the foul ball entering ball passage 606 is bent with respect to the firing path 701 such that the foul ball entering ball passage 606 (the second opening 604) is located on an extension of the foul ball entering ball passage 606.

  With such a configuration, the area through which the shooting ball passes and the gap 802 and the second opening 604 can be provided at different positions, so that the shooting ball does not fall and the foul ball falls. can do. The same effect can be obtained even if a step is provided in each passage.

  In the present embodiment, the passage width of the firing path 701 is designed to be narrow at a position where the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605 and the inner rail 61 face each other. This is to ensure that the foul sphere generated at the end of the firing path does not flow down to the starting end of the firing path, but flows down to the foul ball entrance path 606 without fail.

  In the present embodiment, the foul ball entry path 606 is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13. This is because the player does not feel uncomfortable when responding by paying out prize balls, instead of directly returning the foul balls as in the related art. That is, since the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 17 by entering the foul ball, the upper plate 17 (specifically, the upper plate 17) At the lower left side of the game board 13 which is above and near the point where the game ball is discharged.

  As described above, the use of the foul ball entrance path 606 for processing the foul ball in the firing path 701 eliminates the need to form a dedicated path for returning the foul ball to the player, but has a malicious intention. There is a risk that a player may enter a game ball with a thread into the foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entrance path 606 and manipulate the thread to illegally acquire the game ball. Therefore, a configuration for preventing the above-described fraud will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating a state in which a game ball to which a thread 610 as a thread is attached has reached the foul winning switch 208a in the foul ball entering path 606, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state after the thread 610 is moved in the direction of arrow 611 by the player pulling the thread 610.

  FIG. 5A shows a state in which a game ball to which the thread 610 is attached is fired by the ball firing unit 112a, and the game ball reaches the foul winning switch 208a in the foul winning opening 601. The game ball to which the thread 610 is attached is thrown in from the upper plate 17 like a normal game ball, and is fired by the ball firing unit 112a.

  The thread 610 used for such an illegal game is made of a material that is thin enough not to be caught by a structure in the ball firing unit 112a and that can withstand the weight of the game ball. Specifically, it is a piano wire, a fishing line (made of nylon), a cotton line or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the foul ball entering ball passage 606 is formed to be bent at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launch direction (rolling direction) of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605. When the game ball reaches the foul winning opening 601 (the foul winning switch 208a), the thread 610 attached to the game ball has a substantially V-shaped (or substantially U-shaped) shape (FIG. )reference).

  In FIG. 5A, the guide member 602 is in contact with the inside of a substantially V-shaped thread 610, receives a load of a game ball from the thread 610, and the distal end thereof is on the side of the foul ball entering ball passage 606. It is bent.

  Further, the thread 610 is also in contact with the projection 605c of the guide member 605. This will be described with reference to FIG. The protruding portion 605a is configured to cover the foul winning opening 601 and its tip (line B in FIG. 4) projects to the left from the end of the foul winning opening 601 (line C in FIG. 4). (Line B is to the left of line C). Therefore, a part of the substantially V-shaped thread 610 comes into contact with the protrusion 605a. In addition, the line B in FIG. 4 is a vertical line abutting on the tip end position of the protruding portion 605c, and the line C in FIG. 4 is a vertical line abutting on one end of the foul winning opening 601 (one end on the side where the protruding portion 605c protrudes). Line.

  FIG. 5B shows a state in which the player has operated the thread 610 from the state of FIG. 5A and the thread 610 has moved in the direction of the arrow 611 (the direction opposite to the firing direction of the game ball). In this state, the game ball to which the thread 610 is attached is located above the foul winning switch 208a. In this way, by alternately repeating the state of FIG. 5A and the state of FIG. 5B, an act of detecting a winning switch multiple times using one game ball and illegally acquiring a game ball is performed. Will be.

  Next, differences from FIG. 5A will be described with reference to FIG. The bending state of the guide member 602 is significantly different from the above, except that the position of the game ball to which the thread 610 is attached changes as described above. This is because the guide member 602 bends in the frictional energy generated by the movement of the yarn 610 and bends in the movement direction of the yarn 610. That is, because the thread 610 moves in the direction opposite to the firing direction of the game ball, the guide member 602 receives an external force stronger than the external force when the ball collides with the foul ball. Note that the external force referred to here is conceptually used such as the entire force received by the guide member 602 and the force received by a part of the guide member 602, and the tip surface of the guide member 602 is moved by the movement of the thread 610. Among them, one point in contact with the thread 610 is subjected to an external force, so that the leading end of the guide member 602 is greatly elastically deformed.

  By causing the guide member 602 to elastically deform along with the movement of the thread 610 in this manner, the movement of the thread 610 and the movement of the game ball are not interlocked, and it becomes possible to make unauthorized games difficult. In addition, when elastically deforming, the elastic ball is deformed elastically so that the overall length of the thread 610 becomes shorter, so that even if the thread 610 is pulled, the position of the game ball can be prevented from moving. As such a configuration, a member that is reduced by friction energy generated by movement of the yarn 610 can be considered.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the leading end of the guide member 602 is bent so as to close the firing path 701 with the movement of the thread 610, so that a normal game is performed while performing an illegal act using the thread 610. Even if the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a comes into contact with the guide member 602 (or the thread 610), it is possible to restrict the shot game ball from normally reaching the game area.

  In the present embodiment, the guide member 602 has a function of restricting the movement of the thread 610 and a function of restricting the firing of game balls when performing a normal game while operating the thread 610. Apart from 602, a new member may be used as an anti-fraud member.

  Note that a cutting unit that can cut the thread 610 may be provided on the protrusion 605c. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the yarn 610 from being cut at the position where the yarn 610 comes into contact with the protrusion 605c, and to prevent the above-mentioned fraud. As the cutting means, a means that cuts using a frictional force and a pressure when the yarn 610 moves is considered. Further, a cutting unit may be provided at a portion where the guide member is provided. By doing so, it is possible to provide cutting means at two places where the thread 610 abuts, and it is possible to further prevent illegal games.

  Note that a detection switch may be provided on the protrusion 605c so that the contact state for a predetermined time or more can be detected. In this way, it is also possible to monitor that the threaded game ball has entered the foul ball entering ball passage 606. The location where such a detection switch is installed is not limited to this, and any location where the game ball does not abut for a long time and the thread 610 abuts may be used. Further, a detection switch may be provided to detect that the guiding member 602 is elastically deformed by the thread 610 and comes into contact with the wall (the inner rail 61) on the opposite side of the firing path 701, or the firing path 701 (with the guide member 605). A sensor for detecting the presence of the thread 610 at the location where the inner rail 61 faces) may be provided. This sensor is provided with a plurality of detection units along the firing path 701, and may be any sensor that can determine that the plurality of sensors are detecting an object continuously for a predetermined period or more. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to passing of the game ball or dust attached to the detection unit.

  As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. The balls paid out by the payout device 133 are paid out to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate discharge port 17a by a ball flow path (not shown). A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131. It should be noted that, in addition to the upper plate 17, a ball supply passage (not shown) for supplying game balls to the ball launching unit 112a, The flow may be made to flow down to the firing unit 112a, or a plurality of these paths may be provided, and the flow destination may be switched by the flow path switching mechanism. In this case, it is preferable to operate the flow path switching mechanism so that only the payout of the prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the foul ball winning opening 601 flows down to the ball supply passage or the ball firing unit 112a. By doing so, it is possible to quickly play a game using the game ball provided by the generation of the foul ball.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Although the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment has been described above, the present pachinko machine 10 uses the guiding member 602 to transfer the foul sphere generated in the firing path 701 to the foul sphere entrance path 606. The foul ball is guided to enter the foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entrance path 606. Then, one game ball is paid out from the payout control device 111 based on the ball entering the foul ball winning opening 601 and given to the upper plate 17. By using such a configuration, there is no need to provide a dedicated passage for returning game balls to the upper plate 17 in response to a foul ball, and the cost of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, by using the prize ball payout mechanism based on the entry of the ball into the winning opening, which is conventionally provided in the pachinko machine 10 like the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to achieve more effects.

  In the present embodiment, when one ball is detected, a prize ball is paid out when one ball is detected. However, it is sufficient that a game value equivalent to the detected ball is provided to the player. For example, a gaming machine that digitally manages a held ball may send a signal of the same value to the digital as one gaming ball. In addition, the game value of the number of used game balls and one change of the special symbol 1 is associated in advance, and the number of detected foul balls is counted. The special symbol 1 may be varied as a game value equivalent to the number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the guide member 602 for guiding the foul ball to the foul ball entry passage is provided so as to elastically deform in a direction in which the opening width of the second opening 604 increases by abutting on the foul ball. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently guide the foul ball to the foul ball entrance path. Further, in a state in which the foul ball is not in contact with the guiding member 602, the opening width of the second opening 604 is narrower than in a state in which the foul ball is in contact with the guiding ball 602, so that the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is This makes it difficult to enter the second opening 604.

<Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. The payout control device 111 and the main control device 110 are configured to be able to transmit and receive data bidirectionally by a data transmission / reception circuit. Is transmitted to the sub-controller only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to a special value. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the symbol big hit random number table, it decides that it is the big hit of the special design. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot from the low probability (the special symbol) ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table for low probability of special symbols are respectively provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 (not shown). FIG. 6 (a)).

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. Then, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol is one, and the random number value "0" Is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/40”.

  In addition, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are duplicated values. It is also possible to set a random value for each of the jackpots so as not to cause the hit. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state), by changing the random number value of the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot is obtained. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. When the random number is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol big hit type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set in a first hit type selection table 202b. 110 is provided in the ROM 202.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 21) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 10) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. I have.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, “variable normal reach”, “variable super reach”, “variable special reach” as variation patterns for the deviation. "Various types are defined, and as the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B," common normal reach "various," super common reach "various, and" common special reach "various are defined. Various types of "shared normal reach", various types of "shared super reach", and various types of "shared special reach" are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to a lottery result and a stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202c. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit. The second random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 21).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. And a work area (work area) in which values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like are stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 21), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 20). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the terminal, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  Here, the details of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. . Details of these various tables will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

  FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. , A time reduction counter 203f, a special figure change start flag 203g, an incoming flag 203h, a firing flag 203i, an incoming ball counter 203j, a fired ball counter 203k, a timer counter 203m, and a timer counting flag 203n. And another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In addition, as soon as the ball wins in the first entrance opening 64 (start winning) and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired in accordance with the starting winning, aside from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, From the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed may be predicted (estimated). As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S305 in FIG. 14).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a holding ball number command (see S306 in FIG. 14 and S505 in FIG. 16). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 on the basis of the number of retained balls notified by the display reserved ball number command, and displays a second symbol reservation lamp indicating the number of retained balls. 84 is turned on.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 17).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703: No in FIG. 18).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probable change flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special design. If the value of the probability change flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203e has an initial value set to off, and is set to on at the end of the big hit A (probable change big hit) in the big hit control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). Thereafter, when the start of the next big hit is set, it is set to off (S313 in FIG. 14).

  When the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 15) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process, the value of the probable change flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probable change flag 203e Is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 15).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to zero, and 100 is set at the end of the jackpot B (hours jackpot) in the jackpot control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). That is, when the jackpot B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the counter 203f during the time reduction.

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the value of the normal symbol is determined based on the second random number table 202c for a high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 while the lottery is performed, a lottery of a normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 17).

  The special figure change start flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to start the change of the special symbol. If the special figure change start flag 203g is on, it is the timing to start the change of the special symbol. If the special figure change start flag 203g is off, this indicates that it is not time to start changing the special symbol. The special pattern change start flag 203g is set to ON while a change pattern command is set in the special symbol change start process (see S412 in FIG. 15). Then, it is referred to in the external output process (S1001 in FIG. 21), and when it is determined in the process that the special figure variation start flag 203g is ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation start timing is reached. (S1101: Yes in FIG. 22), the variable pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1103 in FIG. 22), and the command is set to off (see S1102 in FIG. 22).

  The entry flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. If the entry flag 203h is on, a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 and a foul winning is achieved. The switch 208a indicates that a game ball has been detected, and if the ball entry flag 203h is off, this indicates that no game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. This ball entry flag 203h is set to ON when it is determined that the foul winning switch 208a is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (S202 in FIG. 13). . Then, it is referred to in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of main controller 110 (see S1206 in FIG. 23), and when it is determined that ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206 in FIG. 23: Yes) ), The number-of-entry counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207 in FIG. 23), and is turned off (S1208 in FIG. 23).

  That is, the ball entry flag 203h is set to on based on the game ball entering the foul winning opening 601. In the main processing of the main control device 110, the ball entry flag 203h is set based on whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is on. Thus, it is possible to execute a process when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601.

  The firing flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball has been fired. If the firing flag 203i is on, it indicates that the game ball has been fired, and that the game ball has been detected by the fire ball detection switch 208b. If the firing flag 203i is off, it indicates that the game ball has not been fired. The firing flag 203i is set to ON when it is determined that the firing ball detection switch 208b is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (see S206 in FIG. 13). . Then, when the firing flag 203i is determined to be on (S1209 in FIG. 23: Yes), it is referred to in the incoming ball abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (S1209 in FIG. 23). The firing ball number counter 203k is incremented by 1 and set off (S1211 in FIG. 23).

  That is, the launch flag 203i is set to ON based on the launch of the game ball, and in the main processing of the main control device 110, the launch ball 203i is launched based on whether or not the launch flag 203i is ON. It is possible to execute the processing in the case where it has occurred.

  The number-of-entry counter 203j is a predetermined time (in the present embodiment) after a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 during a period of judging an abnormality in entering the foul winning opening 601 (abnormality judging period). This counter is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 at 20 seconds). This entry counter 203j is incremented by 1 when the entry flag 203h is on in the entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 23). See S1207). Then, after the elapse of the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) (S1216 in FIG. 23: Yes), or after the abnormality is determined and the error processing is performed (after the execution of S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23), It is reset to 0 (see S1217 in FIG. 23).

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the incoming ball number counter 203j is larger than a predetermined value Y (10 in the present embodiment) in the incoming ball abnormality determination period (20 seconds) (FIG. 23, S1214: Yes), an error process is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 23). Here, the predetermined value Y (10) is set to a value that does not enter the foul winning opening 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds) if the player intends to execute the game normally when playing the game. I have. Therefore, when the value of the number-of-entry counter becomes larger than the predetermined value Y (10) for a predetermined time (20 seconds) after the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, the player normally plays the game. It is considered that the action has not been executed, that is, an illegal act such as illegally entering the foul winning opening 601 has been executed. Therefore, in this case, the error processing is executed as described above, so that the fact that an illegal act is being executed can be notified.

  The number-of-launched balls counter 203k is a predetermined time (in the present embodiment) after a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 during a period of judging an abnormality in the entering of the foul winning opening 601 (incident abnormality determination period). At 20 seconds), among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a, the game ball that has passed through the fire ball detection switch 208b, that is, the game ball fired by the ball fire unit 112a, and the gap 802 due to a poor firing or the like. This is a counter used to count game balls other than the game balls that have fallen to (hereinafter, referred to as normally fired game balls). This firing number counter 203k is incremented by 1 when the above-described firing flag 203i is on in the incoming ball abnormality determination processing executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (S1210 in FIG. 23). ). After the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) elapses (S1216 in FIG. 23: Yes), or after an error is determined and error processing is performed (after S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), 0 is set. (See S1217 in FIG. 23).

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), the entry number counter is set to a value greater than the value obtained by adding the predetermined value X (2 in the present embodiment) to the value of the shot number counter 203k. When the value of 203j is large, that is, as a result of comparing the number of game balls normally fired and the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601, the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 is 2 When it is determined that there are more balls (three balls or more) (S1212 in FIG. 23: Yes), error processing is executed (S1213 in FIG. 23).

  In this ball entry abnormality determination processing, a situation where the number of winning balls to a specific winning opening is larger than the number of shooting balls, which cannot be generated in a normal game, is detected, and a specific winning opening (Fall winning opening 601) is detected. It is possible to monitor that an illegal act such as illegally entering a game ball is performed.

  Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described incoming ball abnormality determination processing will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, an abnormal entry determination is started, and the number of launched balls counter 203 k and the number of entered balls counter 203 j are counted. For this reason, the game balls that trigger the start of the abnormal ball entry determination are not counted by the launched ball counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, a game ball fired by the ball launching unit 112a has already been left in the launch path 701, and it is considered that the game ball may enter the foul winning opening 601. Can be In consideration of such an assumed error, a predetermined value X is provided so that error processing is executed when a clear abnormal state is detected. Accordingly, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-launches counter 203j is larger than the value of the number-of-launched-balls counter 203k, no error processing is performed, even though no cheating has been performed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the above-described one, and may be a value smaller than 2 (for example, 1) or a value larger than 2 (for example, 5). Further, the predetermined value X need not be set.

  Here, the number-of-incidence counter 203j and the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k are added in the entry-abnormality determination processing because the entry flag 203h is turned on based on the fact that a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. This is the case where the timer counting flag 203n is turned on. Thus, the counting process by the number-of-balls counter 203j and the number-of-shots counter 203k necessary for the abnormality determination can be executed only during the abnormal-ball-entry determination period (20 seconds), so that a game other than the abnormal-ball-entry determination period is performed. The processing load on the machine can be reduced. The counting process by the firing number counter 203k may be performed at all times, and the number of balls counted during the period during which the abnormal ball entry is determined may be taken out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number-of-entry-balls counter 203j and the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k are configured to be added in the processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The addition may be made in other processes such as a process executed in the interrupt process of the device 110.

  The timer counter 203m is a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, after the game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 during the entry failure determination period in the entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main control device 110. 20 seconds). The predetermined time is not limited to 20 seconds, but may be 10 seconds shorter than this or 30 seconds longer than this, and can be changed by changing the value set in the timer counter 203m. I have.

  The timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (in 20 seconds) when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entry flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. (Equivalent) is set (S1204 in FIG. 23). Then, when the timer counting flag 203m is on, the count value is decremented by 1 each time the in-ball abnormality determination processing is executed (S1202 in FIG. 23), and when the timer counter 203m becomes 0 (FIG. 23). S1216: Yes), the processing after the elapse of the predetermined time is executed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23). Here, since the incoming ball abnormality determination process is a process executed every 4 ms in the main process of main controller 110, timer counter 203m is decremented by 1 every 4 ms. That is, when 5000 is set in the timer counter 203m, the value becomes 0 after 20 seconds, and the process is performed after a predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23).

  In addition, the timer counter 203m determines that there is an abnormality during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), and executes error processing (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), a predetermined time ( Since the abnormal ball entry determination is completed without waiting for the elapse of 20 seconds), it is reset to 0 after the execution of the error processing.

  The timer counting flag 203n indicates a period during which the abnormal ball entry is determined in the abnormal entry ball determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (the predetermined time after the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 described above). ). The timer counting flag 203n is set to the above-described timer when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entry flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. The counter 203m is set and turned on (see S1205 in FIG. 23). Then, it is referred to every time the ball entry abnormality determination processing is executed (S1201 in FIG. 23), and is set to OFF when the timer entry 203m becomes 0 after the entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) has elapsed. (S1218 in FIG. 23). Further, when it is determined that there is an abnormality during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) and error processing is performed (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is performed), a predetermined time (20 seconds) elapses. 23, the ball entry abnormality determination is terminated without waiting, so that it is turned off after the execution of the error processing, similarly to the timer counter 203m described above (S1218 in FIG. 23).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, details of the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

  As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) is a table in which the value of a random number that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a includes a table (a first random number table 202a for a low probability) and a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability. There is provided a table (first random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is different. I have. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9B) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected. Specifically, the value “0-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A, and “50-99” is set as the determination value of the big hit B.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which hit values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 9C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol (during the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is "5 to 28". In the case of the range, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability (during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number buffer counter is in the range of “5 to 204”, the normal symbol is not displayed. It is determined to be a hit. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol hits, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and The electric accessory is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10A) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern table 202d. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10 (b)), an off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10 (c)), At least a deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern table in a time-saving gaming state, a variation pattern table corresponding to a value stored in the special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203a, and the like are also set.

  Next, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds) are “0 to 50”, and the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds) are “51 to 179” and various special reach (90 seconds). With respect to the fluctuation pattern of (1), “180 to 198” are set as the judgment values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, determines the fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the big hit. Is selected from the change pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of the fluctuation pattern to be selected (the fluctuation time) is set when the special symbol lottery result is out of order. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is completely out of range, a short out (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long out (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol to be deviated when the game state is the probable change game state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 that is set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal game state is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from being prolonged at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot is prolonged from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and an external output terminal board 261 are connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. It transmits various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes an input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, a foul winning switch 208a, a shooting ball detection switch 208b, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group 208c (not shown), and a power supply device. A MPU 201 is connected to a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described below provided on the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51 a provided on the operation handle 51 via the input / output port 215 and the firing control device 112, a stop switch 51, and an operation amount detection switch. Various processes are executed based on the signal output from the switch 51c, the signal output from the various switches 208, and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, the external output terminal board 261 and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  As described above, the external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, and receives a signal from each input / output port. The signals to be received include, for example, an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality of the main control device 110, an error signal indicating a state determined to be an error by the processing performed by the main control device 110, and a prize detected by the main control device 110 And a prize ball payout signal indicating that a prize ball has been paid out in the payout control device 111.

  In the present embodiment, a prize detection signal and a prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the foul prize switch 208b provided in the prize ball prize port 601 which is a prize port for a foul ball to enter, are transmitted to various other prize ports provided in the other prize ports. It is configured to be output separately from the winning detection signal and the prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the switch. When analyzing the game result of the pachinko machine 10 on the hall computer side, generally, the ratio of the total number of used game balls (total out) to the total number of paid out game balls (total safe) is calculated. This is because, although the calculation (base calculation) is performed, if the number of prize balls paid out based on the foul balls not used in the game is added, it is impossible to calculate an accurate base value. Therefore, the output form is different so that the hall computer can remove the number of prize balls paid out based on the foul ball.

  These signals are transmitted from each of the control devices (110, 111) to a corresponding one of a plurality of ports provided for receiving a signal provided on the external output terminal board 261. The signal received at each port is referred to by the hall computer 262. In the present embodiment, a plurality of ports corresponding to various signals are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and identifiers may be added to various signals and transmission and reception may be performed through one port. The received signal can be identified by the identifier as to which information the signal indicates. Thus, the number of ports provided on the external output terminal board 261 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  The launch control device 112 launches a sphere so as to have a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 detected by the operation amount detection switch 51c when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. This is for controlling the unit 112a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 controls the output of sound in the sound output device 226, the output of turning on and off the light in the lamp display device (the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the display control such as the fluctuation effect (variation display). The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the device 114 is controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 has at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a.

  In the variation pattern table 222a, variation patterns corresponding to the types of variation patterns (off, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a power-off processing flag 223x, and a power-off flag 223y and at least a memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and for lighting an LED (not shown) indicating the reserved ball number. That is, in response to the reception of the number-of-retained-balls command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the number of retained balls indicated by the command in the special-designated-reserved-ball number counter 223b, controls the lighting of the LED, and performs the control after the storage. In order to notify the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 26), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1602 in FIG. 27). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 26), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 27).

  The power-off processing flag 223x indicates that a power-off command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main control device 110 detects the power-off, and the power-off flag 223y is set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command. The power is turned off, and power-off processing is performed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). When the power-off processing ends, the power-off processing in-progress flag 223x is set to off (see S1417 in FIG. 25). The power-off processing in-progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up processing (see S1302 in FIG. 24). If it is on, the power is turned off during the power-off processing (that is, the RAM is destroyed). Thus, the processing in the case where the RAM is destroyed is executed without checking the RAM destruction.

  The power-off flag 223y is set so that when the main controller 110 detects the power-off, a power-off command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the audio-lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is set, and the power-off process is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). Then, in the startup process (FIG. 24) of the sound lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1310 in FIG. 24). reference).

  The other memory area 223z further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 26) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Since the display control device 114 is a known device, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches (the foul winning switch 208a, the launch ball detection switch 208b, etc.) connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the processing corresponding to the state of the switch is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball is passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67. The accompanying through gate passing process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S101). This switch reading process (S101) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), reads the status of various switches connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and sets the status of various switches. This is a process for executing a corresponding process.

  In this switch reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the foul winning switch 208a is on (S201). The foul winning switch 208a is turned on when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 and the game ball passes through the foul winning switch 208a. In the processing of S201, when it is determined that the foul winning switch 208a is on (S201: Yes), the ball entry flag 203h is set on (S202), a foul winning command is set (S203), and the processing of S204 is performed. Move on to processing.

  By setting the ball entry flag 203h to ON in the process of S202, in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) executed in the main process of the main controller 110, a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601. Can be detected. The foul winning command set in the processing of S203 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Upon receiving the foul winning command, the payout control device 111 controls the payout motor 216 so as to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the command (one ball in the present embodiment).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S201 that the foul winning switch 208a is off (S201: No), the processing of S202 and S203 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S204.

  When the processing of S201 or S203 is completed, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204). The timer counting flag 203n is turned on when it is determined that the ball entry flag is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) described later (S1204 in FIG. 23). The on state is continued until the period for judging an abnormality in ball entry (ball entry abnormality judgment period) elapses. In the present embodiment, the entry abnormality determination period is set to 20 seconds. If it is determined in S204 that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the shooting ball detection switch 208b is ON (S205). The fired ball detection switch 208b is turned on when a game ball is fired and the game ball passes through the fired ball detection switch 208b. In the processing of S205, when it is determined that the shooting ball detection switch 208b is on (S205: Yes), the shooting flag 203i is set on (S206), and the process proceeds to S207.

  That is, when a game ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch 208b while the timer counting flag 203n is on (S205: Yes), the launch flag 203i is set to on (S206). ). Thus, the state of the fired ball detection switch can be read only during the period of the incoming ball abnormality determination that requires counting the number of fired balls, so that the processing load can be reduced. In addition, in the case of counting the number of fired balls in other processing or detecting a fired ball, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured to read the state of the fired ball detection switch even during periods other than the incoming ball abnormality determination period. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is not on (S204: No), and when it is determined that the launching ball detection switch 208b is not on (S205: No), the process proceeds to S206. The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S207.

  In the process of S207, a process of reading other switches is executed (S207). As other switches, for example, detection of a ball entering the above various entrances (first entrance 64, second entrance 67) and various entrances (general entrance 63, specific entrance 65a) is detected. And a touch sensor 51a, a stop switch 51b, and an operation amount detection switch 51c which are input via the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112. When the ball sensor detects the entry of a game ball of various entrances or various prize ports, detection information (prize detection information) is stored based on the entered ball port or prize port. The winning detection information stored here is referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 22) executed in the main process of the main control device 110, and a prize ball command based on the winning detection information is transmitted to the payout control device 111. As a result, a prize ball is paid out based on the entry of the ball into the entrance or the winning opening. In addition, based on the detection results of the touch sensor 51a, the stop switch 51b, and the operation amount detection switch 51c, a firing permission signal and a firing instruction signal are transmitted to the firing control device.

  The various switches 208 described above (the foul winning switch 208a, the fire ball detection switch 208b, and the other switch 208c) are turned off after being read in the switch reading process. Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem caused by continuously reading the state of the switch.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that whether or not a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 is detected by the above-described switch reading process executed every 2 ms. That is, by detecting the state of the foul winning switch 208a every 2 ms, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, a time of 2 ms or more is required for one game ball to pass through the foul winning switch 208a. Therefore, while the state of the foul winning switch 208a is detected by the switch reading process (for 2 ms), two or more game balls pass through the foul winning switch 208a, and the number of passed game balls cannot be calculated (missing). ) Can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the state of the foul winning switch 208a is detected in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be detected in the process of (1). The interval at which the state of the foul winning switch 208a is detected may be changed as appropriate according to the time during which one game ball passes through the foul winning switch 208a.

  Further, the foul winning switch 208a of the present embodiment is configured to be able to output a signal for each ball even when game balls continuously pass. Specifically, the foul winning switch 208a has a through hole (diameter 12mm) which is slightly larger than the game ball (diameter 11mm), so that two game balls cannot pass at the same time. Therefore, when the game balls pass in a row, the game balls pass in a horizontal direction with respect to the passing direction. Here, the foul winning switch 208a is provided with a detection unit that detects a magnetic field that changes as a game ball passes and outputs an electric signal according to the magnitude of the magnetic field. The changing magnetic field changes according to the volume of the game ball in the detection range of the detection unit, and the detection range of the detection unit is smaller than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. It is configured to be a range. As a result, the magnetic field changes from "weak" to "strong" each time one game ball passes, and then changes to "weak" again. As a result, even if the game balls pass in succession, the magnetic field (the corresponding electrical signal) changes to "weak" each time one ball passes, so the game balls pass in succession. In this case, it is possible to detect the passage of a game ball for each ball and output a signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S301). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S302: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display is retained in the special symbol) is acquired (S303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S304). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S304). No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S304: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S305) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S306). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 21) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S306, the data stored in the special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S307). In the process of S307, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S308). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S309). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S309: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S309, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S309: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S310). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the processing of S310 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S311). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S311: Yes), the jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S312). Then, the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S313), and the process proceeds to S316.

  In the process of S311, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S311: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S314), and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 If this is the case (S314: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S314: No), the process of S315 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S316.

  When the processing of S313 or S315 is completed, a stop command is set (S316), and this processing ends. The stop command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output as a voice in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 21) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of stopping the running variable display by the stop type received by the stop type command.

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S308). This special symbol change start process (S308) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of the "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S401).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S402). If the probable change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, and if the value of the probable change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state.

  When the value of the probable change flag 203e is on (S402: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the process of S401 and the value for the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S403). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number values stored in the special symbol big random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S402, if the probability change flag 203e is off (S402: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S401 and Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S404). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for low probability. As the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot, one of "0" is set. When the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value which is a hit match, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined that there is. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S403 or S404 is a special symbol jackpot (S405), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S405: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, Among the jackpots B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the hit is big hit A (16R probability variable hit), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the big hit is obtained. B (16R time saving big hit) is determined (see FIG. 9B).

  In the process of S406, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S407). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S407, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for long time)”, “outside (for short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “special special reach” various types are defined. As the fluctuation patterns for jackpots, various types of "common normal reach", various types of "common super reach", and various types of "common special reach" are specified. Variation patterns of winning / losing common are various types of "common normal reach", "common" Various types of "super reach" and various types of "shared special reach" are specified.

  In the process of S405, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way (S405: No), the display mode at the time of being out of place is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S407, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the process of S407 or S409 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S407 or S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 21). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S411 is completed, the special figure variation start flag 203g indicating that it is the timing to start the special symbol variation is set to ON (S412), and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Based on the special figure change start flag 203g set in the processing of S412, it is determined in the external output processing (see FIG. 22) that it is the change start timing of the special symbol (see S1101 of FIG. 22), and the change start timing of the special symbol (S1101: Yes in FIG. 22), the variation pattern command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the processing of S4010 is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. (See S1103 in FIG. 22). The sound ramp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, a variation effect based on the received command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S501). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  Then, there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S503: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by an external output process of a main process (see FIG. 21) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. In the process (see S1108 in FIG. 22), the sound is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S505, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S506), and this processing ends. In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the start winning process, the lottery result in the special symbol may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in advance from the values indicated by the various random number counters acquired based on the start winning. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect based on the lottery result after the change, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and controls the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory, and the like. This is the process to perform.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes a period during which the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit and a period during which the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is being performed. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203f during the time reduction in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the time reduction counter 203f is equal to or greater than 1 (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. That is, during a special symbol jackpot (that is, during a special game state), the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a specific winning opening 65a. However, when the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened, a ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a enters the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is to suppress opening of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 and to make it easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 can be prevented from entering the ball during the special jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9C).

  In the processing of S608, if the value of the during-hours reduction counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the second random number table 202c for probabilities, a lottery result on whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9C).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “「 ”is set to be lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is hitting at the present time. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with the set 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the processing of S614, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the processing shifts to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. Since the opening period of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball enters the first entrance 64. It will be in an easy state.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1015 of the main processing (see FIG. 21). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001).

  Here, the details of the external output process (S1001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the external output processing (S1001). This external output processing (S1001) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 21) and is based on the presence or absence of various flags and winning detection information set in the switch reading processing in S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). This is a process for performing the process.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure change start flag 203g is on (S1101). In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 203g is ON (S1101: Yes), it is the timing to start the change of the special symbol, and the change is performed by the above-described special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 15). Since the pattern command is set, the special fluctuation start flag 203g is set to off (S1102), and the fluctuation pattern command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1103). ). Then, control proceeds to the process of S1104.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the special figure change start flag 203g is off (S1101: No), it is not the timing to start the change of the special symbol, so the processing of S1102 and S1103 is skipped. The process proceeds to S1104.

  In the process of S1104, it is determined whether or not there is a foul winning command (S1104). If it is determined that there is a foul winning command (S1104: Yes), a foul winning command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. At the same time, a signal is output to the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the foul ball winning command (S1105). When the payout control device 111 receives the foul winning command, the payout motor 216 is controlled so as to pay out a prize ball (one ball in the present embodiment) according to the command. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no foul winning command in the process of S1104 (S1104: No), the process of S1105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1106.

  In the process of S1106, it is determined whether or not there is an error command (S1106). If it is determined that there is an error command (S1106: Yes), the error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the external A signal is output to a terminal of the output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command (S1107). Here, examples of the error command include an error command (S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23) set in the incoming ball abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) described later. The destination to which the error command is sent may be changed according to the type of the error command. For example, an error command for stopping the payout of award balls may be transmitted to the payout control unit 111. . By transmitting an error command to stop payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 111 when an illegal action is detected, the payout by the payout control device 111 can be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S1106 (S1106: No), the process of S1107 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1108.

  In the process of S1108, a command other than the above-described command is transmitted. As a command other than the above-described command, for example, based on the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 12), if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of acquired balls. Send the prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) and the start winning process (see FIG. 16) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted by the processing of S1103 described above, thereafter, a stop type command for stopping the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. .

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. After the processing of S1001, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the first variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the game ball is illegally entered into the foul winning opening 601. A ball entry abnormality determination process for detecting an illegal action is executed (S1004).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the details of the incoming ball abnormality determination process (S1004) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball abnormality determination process (S1004). This entry abnormality determination processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the number of shot game balls and the number of game balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 are provided. This is a process for detecting an abnormal ball entry into the foul winning opening 601 or an illegal act based on the above.

  In the entry abnormality determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201). The timer counting flag 203n is set to ON by the processing of S1205 described later, and is set to OFF after a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1218). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201: Yes), the timer counter 203m for measuring a predetermined time is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is off (S1201: No), the ball entry flag 203h is turned on to determine whether a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. It is determined whether or not there is (S1203). In the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is not turned on (S1203: No), there is no game ball entered into the foul winning opening 601 and it is not during the period for judging an abnormal ball entry. The process ends.

  In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1203: Yes), the timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (corresponding to 20 seconds) to start the ball entry abnormality determination ( (S1204), the timer count flag 203n is set to ON (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  When the processing of S1202 or S1205 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is on (S1206). In the processing of S1206, when it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206: Yes), it is a case where a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 during the ball entry abnormality determination period. The counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207), the entry flag 203h is set to off (S1208), and the process shifts to S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1206 that the incoming flag 203h is off (S1206: No), the processing of S1207 and S1208 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1209.

  In the processing of S1209, it is determined whether or not the firing flag 203i is on (S1209). In the processing of S1209, if it is determined that the firing flag 203i is ON (S1209: Yes), it means that a game ball has been fired during the abnormal ball entry determination period, and thus the fired ball counter 203k is incremented by one. Then (S1210), the firing flag 203i is set to off (S1211), and the process shifts to S1212. On the other hand, in the processing of S1209, when it is determined that the firing flag 203i is off (S1209: No), the processing of S1210 and S1211 is skipped and the processing shifts to S1212.

  Next, a ball entry abnormality is determined based on a ball entry number counter 203j corresponding to the number of game balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 and a shot ball number counter 203k corresponding to the number of shot game balls. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball number counter 203j is larger than the value obtained by adding the predetermined value X (2 in this embodiment) to the value of the number of fired ball number counter 203k (S1212). In the process of S1212, as a result of comparing the number of game balls normally fired and the number of game balls entered into the foul winning opening 601, the game ball entered into the foul winning opening 601 is more normally fired. It is determined whether or not there are two more balls (three or more balls) than the game balls. If it is determined that there are many (S1212: Yes), an error command is set (S1213), assuming that an illegal act such as illegally entering a game ball into the foul winning opening 601 is performed (S1213). The process moves to S1217.

  Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described incoming ball abnormality determination processing will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, an abnormal entry determination is started, and the number of launched balls counter 203 k and the number of entered balls counter 203 j are counted. For this reason, the game balls that trigger the start of the abnormal ball entry determination are not counted by the launched ball counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, a game ball fired by the ball launching unit 112a has already been left in the launch path 701, and it is considered that the game ball may enter the foul winning opening 601. Can be In consideration of such an assumed error, a predetermined value X is provided so that error processing is executed when a clear abnormal state is detected. Accordingly, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-launches counter 203j is larger than the value of the number-of-launched-balls counter 203k, no error processing is performed, even though no cheating has been performed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the above-described one, and may be a value smaller than 2 (for example, 1) or a value larger than 2 (for example, 5). Further, the predetermined value X need not be set.

  The error command set in the process of S1213 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output process (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to a corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. Is done. By receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute sound output and screen display indicating that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of fired balls. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to notify the employee of the hall or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of shot balls. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1212 that the number is not large (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-entry counter 203j is larger than 10 (S1214). When the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than the predetermined value Y (10 in the present embodiment) (S1214: Yes), the number of game balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is greater than the number of launched game balls. This is a case where the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is large although the number of balls has not increased. Here, when playing the game, if the player is trying to execute the game normally, no more than 10 game balls enter the foul winning opening 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds). Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1217.

  The error command set by the processing of S1215 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output processing (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to a corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. Is done. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the sound output and the screen display indicating that the number of foul winnings is large by receiving the error command. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to notify the employee of the hall or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is large.

  In the processing of S1214, when it is determined that the number-of-entry counter 203j is equal to or less than the predetermined value Y (10) (S1214: No), a timer is used to determine whether it is the end timing of the abnormal entry pitch determination period. It is determined whether the counter 203m is 0 (S1216). If it is determined that the timer counter 203m is 0 (S1216: Yes), it is the end timing of the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), and the process proceeds to S1217 to determine that the timer counter 203m is not 0. If it has been performed (S1216: No), the ball entry abnormality determination is continuously performed, and thus this process is terminated as it is.

  When the processing of S1213, S1215 or S1216 is completed, various counter values are reset (S1217). Specifically, when an error command is set by the process of S1213 or S1215, or when it is determined by the process of S1216 that it is the end timing of the ball entry abnormality determination period (S1216: Yes), the entry abnormality determination is performed. In order to end the process, the number-of-entry-balls counter 203j, the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k, and the timer counter 203m are reset to zero. Next, the timer counting flag 203n is set to off (S1218), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) of the present embodiment, an error command is set when it is determined that the entry is abnormal during the entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds). . Thus, occurrence of an abnormality can be detected at an early stage. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to determine whether or not there is an abnormality after the elapse of the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds). In this case, the abnormality can be determined after acquiring the information necessary for the abnormality determination for the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), so that the accuracy of the abnormality determination can be improved and the unnecessary abnormality is notified. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 and the number of fired game balls that have been fired are counted in the ball entry abnormality determination processing (S1004), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the count may be performed in another process such as a process executed in a timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the method of judging an abnormality in entering a ball is not limited to the above-described methods and combinations. For example, an abnormality may be determined by only one of the abnormality determinations in S1212 and S1214, or another abnormality determination may be performed. You may make it add. The other abnormality determination is to determine, for example, a case where the interval at which the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 is on average earlier than the interval at which the game ball can be fired (0.6 seconds in the present embodiment). And the like.

  Further, the trigger for starting the ball entry abnormality determination is not limited to the one triggered by the entry of a game ball into the foul winning opening 601, but may be, for example, a measurement at predetermined time intervals.

  In the present embodiment, the abnormality is determined by counting the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 and the number of game balls that have been fired. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The abnormality may be determined using the result of counting the number of game balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 67) and the out entrance 66. For example, with respect to the counted number of game balls fired, the counted number of game balls that entered the foul winning opening 601 and the counted number of game balls launched into the game area without entering the foul winning opening 601 May be determined to be abnormal when the total value of.

  Further, when there is a continuous ball entry into the foul winning opening 601 and the abnormal ball entry determination is performed again (when the abnormal ball entry determination period is reached after the end of the abnormal ball entry determination period), an illegal act is performed. It is likely that it has been done. On the other hand, in the case where the entering ball abnormality determination period is the first time immediately after the start of the game, it is highly likely that the player has mistakenly made a prize winning when starting to hit. Therefore, in the first ball entry abnormality determination after the game is started, the threshold value for determining that there is a ball entry abnormality is set high (for example, 15 balls or more are determined to be abnormal in S1214), and it is difficult to make the abnormality determination. In the abnormal ball entry determination, the threshold value for determining that there is an abnormal ball entry may be lowered (for example, five or more balls are determined to be abnormal in S1214) to facilitate the abnormality determination. This makes it possible to accurately detect fraudulent activity while suppressing unnecessary error notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of items to be determined in the first and subsequent ball entry abnormality determinations may be increased from the first time (for example, only the first time is determined in S1212, and the first transition is determined in S1212 and S1214). In the subsequent ball entry abnormality determination, the threshold value and the determination item may be changed stepwise. Further, after the timer counter becomes 0 (S1216 in FIG. 23: Yes), while the timer count flag is ON (during the abnormal ball entry determination period), the number of entry counters becomes larger than a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment). A process of determining whether the value is larger than a small predetermined value Z (for example, 5) may be added. Even with these processes, it is possible to improve the effect that it is possible to accurately detect fraudulent activity while suppressing unnecessary error notification.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the error command is set to one. However, the error command may be set in a plurality of stages according to the possibility of the illegal game being performed. In such a case, in addition to the above-described ball entry abnormality determination processing, the determination may be performed using a pattern in which the determination value (determination value) is set low. By doing so, in addition to outputting that the illegal game is being performed, a minor error command such as a situation where the player is operating the operation handle 51 by mistake or a malfunction of the operation handle 51 is set. By transmitting the sound to the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to give a game explanation ("Please turn the operation handle more") by voice or liquid crystal display, or to notify a malfunction of the operation handle.

  Specifically, the timing at which the player operates the operating handle 51 to change the firing intensity (at the start of a game, at the start of a right hit game, at the end of a right hit game, etc.) is defined as the timing at which the abnormal ball entry process is started. The game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 during a predetermined period therefrom are counted. If the counted value is larger than the predetermined value, there is a possibility that the launching device has a problem, so that the fact can be output. With such a configuration, it is possible to not only monitor the illegal game, but also determine a malfunction of the operation handle 51. When both the malfunction determination of the operation handle 51 and the monitoring of the illegal game are performed, a plurality of determination results of the abnormal ball entry determination process may be stored and determined in a time series. That is, in the case of the ball entering the foul winning opening 601 due to the malfunction of the operation handle 51, it repeatedly occurs unless the operation handle 51 is repaired. This is because it occurs within the specified period.

  Desirably, the abnormal ball entry determination based on the illegal game has a strict determination value for the abnormal ball entry determination and shortens the period used for the determination. It is preferable that the determination value used for the determination is lower than the value used for the determination of the illegal game, and the period used for the determination is made longer. In this way, both can make the determination.

  Further, the timing at which the firing intensity is changed is set to the timing at which the abnormal incoming ball processing is started. However, it is preferable that the abnormal incoming ball processing is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the change of the firing intensity. The reason that the predetermined time has elapsed is that this prevents the detection of a game ball fired before the firing intensity is changed, and the game ball and the firing intensity changed before the firing intensity is changed. This is to prevent a game ball that has been fired after being hit and colliding with the game ball to an unintended area, thereby preventing such a game ball from being detected.

  The timing at which the malfunction of the operation handle 51 is determined is not limited to the above-described timing, and may be performed at all times, or may be performed during a state in which a firing instruction is issued so that the firing intensity becomes a predetermined value or more.

  Further, it is preferable that the content of notification to the outside when the malfunction of the operation handle is determined be changed according to the gaming state (whether or not a big hit is occurring). For example, if a big hit is in progress, the notification priority may be increased so that the clerk can come immediately. The process of changing the notification content in this manner may be performed by the main control device using information based on the determination result of the incoming ball abnormality determination and information based on the gaming state of the gaming machine, or may be a voice that acquires the respective information. The lamp control device may do so. Further, storage means for storing information based on the fact that the malfunction of the operation handle is determined during the big hit may be provided.

  In the above-described ball entry abnormality determination processing, the number of balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 is counted, and the entry abnormality determination is performed based on the counted result. Such control may be performed.

  That is, the ball entry flag 203h and the firing flag 203i may be constantly read from the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the ball entry abnormality may be determined based on the timing when each flag is turned on.

  Specifically, it may be determined that the ball entry abnormality is determined when the entry flag 203h is turned on while the firing flag 203i is not turned on. This is to determine a state in which a gaming ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 even though the gaming ball has not been fired.

  In addition, since there is a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the foul winning opening 601, the firing flag 203 i is turned on a predetermined time before the timing when the firing flag 203 i is turned on. It is good to judge whether it becomes. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably determine an incoming ball abnormality.

  Further, the timing of the predetermined time is started at the timing when the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, that is, at the timing when the entering flag 203 h is turned on, and until the predetermined time (0.6 seconds) elapses. It may be determined that a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. By doing so, it is possible to detect a state in which the game ball is entering the foul winning opening 601 at a timing shorter than the interval at which the game ball is fired by the operation handle 51 (0.6 seconds).

  When the foul spheres are continuously generated, the foul spheres may be connected in a daisy chain in the firing path 701. Therefore, the predetermined time may be appropriately set, and may be shorter than 0.6 second. Further, an abnormal ball entry may be determined based on a state in which a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 within a predetermined time is detected a plurality of times. By doing so, the accuracy of monitoring the illegal game can be further improved.

  Further, a game area reaching ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the fired game ball has reached the game area is provided near the end of the firing path 701, and a foul winning switch 208a, a firing ball detection switch 208b, The passing state of the launched game balls may be detected based on the detection results of the three switches of the game area reaching ball detection switches. By doing so, the accuracy of monitoring whether the detection result of the foul winning switch 208a is based on a normal game or an unauthorized game can be further improved.

  Specifically, the game ball detected by the shooting ball detection switch 208a passes either the foul winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch after a predetermined time. Therefore, timing of a predetermined time is started at the timing when the shooting ball detection switch 208a detects a game ball, and when the foul winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch detects a game ball within the predetermined time, the detection is performed. Is determined to be normal, and at other times, that is, when the foul winning switch 208a and the game area reaching ball detection switch both detect a game ball within the predetermined time, and when the foul ball is detected outside the predetermined time. When the winning switch 208 detects a game ball, the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process is started. By doing in this way, it is possible to determine that the game ball detected by the launch ball detection switch 208a has reached the game area, that is, that the game ball is playing an illegal game while playing a normal game. Become.

  When such control is used, a plurality of areas (storable for four balls) may be provided for storing the detection result of the fired ball detection switch 208b. This is because the newly fired ball is fired by the fired ball detection switch 208b from when it is detected by the fired ball detection switch 208b to when it passes through the foul winning switch 208a or the game area arrival ball detection switch. To pass through.

  As described above, even if a switch for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at each position on the firing path, and the detection state of each switch is detected, the function for counting the detection result of each switch is not provided. It is possible to achieve the same object and effect as the ball entry abnormality determination processing described in the present embodiment. In the description of the control described above, the description of the same portions as the ball entry abnormality determination processing of this embodiment (see FIG. 23) is omitted, but the ball entry abnormality determination processing of this embodiment (see FIG. 23). ) Or may be provided independently.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. When the process of S1004 is completed, then, if the special symbol is in the state of the jackpot, the execution of the jackpot effect and the jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 are executed (S1005). . In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or the ball has won a specified number. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  In the big hit control process (S1005), a command based on the big hit state of the special symbol is set. For example, an opening command is set when the special symbol jackpot starts, and an ending command is set when the special symbol jackpot ends.

  The jackpot-related command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the jackpot-related command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a corresponding display command to the display control device 114. When a display command is received by the display control device 114, a corresponding jackpot-related effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round in the jackpot game, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round, a round number command indicating the number of rounds may be set and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Accordingly, the start timing of a new round can be determined in the audio lamp control device 113, and the music and the effect can be changed in accordance with the start of the new round.

  At the end of the big hit game, a probability change flag 203e and a time reduction counter 203f are set based on the type of the special symbol being hit. Specifically, when the jackpot game with the jackpot A (probably variable jackpot) is being executed, the probability change flag 203e is set to ON, and when the jackpot game with the jackpot B (hour-saving jackpot) is being executed, the middle-hour game is being executed. The counter 203f is set to 100. As a result, the probable change game state is provided based on the jackpot A, and the time-saving game state is provided based on the jackpot B.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 17). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 or S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S407 or the process of S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S406 or the process of S408 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 17), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 19 has been executed, the processing at S1013 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initial processing of the startup processing (see FIG. 20) is performed. In the setting process (S901), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag 223x is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). It is determined whether or not the process has been started during the execution of (see S1302) (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 25), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1416. The power-off processing flag 223x is turned on before the execution of the power-off processing, and the power-off processing flag 223x is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1416 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag 223x.

  If the power-off processing flag 223x is off (S1302: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and It is started after the execution of the power-off processing is completed, or is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It is. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1416 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the flow shifts to S1308.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1416, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on at the time of executing the power-off process in S1416 (see S1416 in FIG. 25). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process in S1416 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is on is instantaneous in this startup process. This is a case where the power supply is started after the occurrence of a power failure and the execution of the power-off process in S1416 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1310). Then, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), the CPU sets interrupt permission (S1312) and shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1308 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process from step S1304 to step S1306 is performed. Or the process is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the processing skips S1309 and S1310, which are the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the processing to S1311, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), and then permits interruption. Is set (S1312), and the routine goes to a main process.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process from S1304 to the process of S1308 is performed via the process of S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1411. In the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1402 to S1411 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1412, the variable display setting process of S1413, and the process of updating the counter values of S1413 and S1414 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1413 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process in S1410, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is executed (S1411). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1412 is completed, a variable display setting process is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect (S1412). Specifically, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1412 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1413). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag 223x are turned on (S1415), and the power-off processing is executed (S1416). . After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag 223x is turned off (S1417), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1414), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1414: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1414: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1411). This command determination process (S1411) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this process, when receiving the number-of-retained-balls command from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1501). When a variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1503). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 27) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 27) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), then it is determined whether an error command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1507). If an error command has been received (S1507: Yes), error processing (such as setting of a display error command) according to the received command is executed (S1508), and this processing ends.

  Here, the error command in the present embodiment is a case where it is determined in the above-described ball entry abnormality determination processing (see FIG. 23) executed by main controller 110 that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of shot balls. At least, and an error command (S1215) set when it is determined that the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is large.

  Specifically, in the processing of S1508, when the error command set in the processing of S1213 is received, the setting is made so as to output a sound that "the number of fouls is greater than the number of firings", and " The number of fouls is greater than the number of characters "is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the error command set in the processing of S1215 is received, the voice of "the number of fouls" is set to be output and the character "the number of fouls" is displayed in the third symbol. A display error command to be displayed on the device 81 is set. The present invention is not limited to this, and the sound to be set may be an alarm sound (for example, a sound such as “peep-peep”). ) May be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the abnormality is configured to be notified in a manner recognizable to surrounding players. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is notified in a mode that can be recognized only by employees of the hall (for example, A specific LED may emit light), or the occurrence of an abnormality may be notified only by a hall computer without performing notification by voice or screen display. Thereby, fraud monitoring can be performed without the player being informed that fraud monitoring is being performed.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 starts an error display corresponding to the command on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1507, if no error command has been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S1509). ), And return to the main processing. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. Set the command so that it is sent to Other commands include, for example, the above-mentioned opening command and the number of retained balls command.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1412). This variable display setting process (S1412) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1606. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then, in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  When the processing of S1604 ends, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing of S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1606). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1606: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the variable display setting process is terminated. Return to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1606: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1607). Then, in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26), The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1608).

  Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1609). To end. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of handling a foul ball generated when a player plays a game, a situation in which a foul winning opening 601 is provided and the player can play the game again by paying out with the award ball. Because it does not require a dedicated passage for returning foul balls as in the past, it is possible to use the vacant space for another mechanism, and it is possible to freely design a gaming machine. It is possible to increase the degree. In particular, when the foul winning opening 601 is provided on the game board 13 and the payout control device 111, the upper plate 17, and the ball firing unit 112a are provided on the inner frame 12 side, the components are transferred from the game board 13 side to the inner frame 12 side. It is necessary to provide a passage for returning the foul ball so as to straddle it, and such a gaming machine is more effective.

  Further, by providing the foul winning port 601 at a position using the gravity flow of the foul ball in the firing path 701, the foul ball can be easily branched from the firing path 701.

  Further, since a branch path to the foul winning opening 601 is provided so as to avoid an area where the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a passes, the game is not hindered.

  Further, even if the foul winning opening 601 is provided at a position closer to the ball launching unit 112a than the winning opening provided in the game area, a structure for preventing improper operation by the threaded ball or a control for monitoring the improper operation. , It is possible to deal with fraudulently.

<First Modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The first modified example is different from the first embodiment described above in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed, the guide member is removed, and the number of paths of game balls that can enter the foul winning opening 601 is increased. It is otherwise identical. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the first modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is directed to the foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. Also, among the game balls that have reached the game area from the first opening 603 of the firing path 701, game balls having extremely low firing strength flow down a special flow path provided on the inner peripheral side of the inner rail 61 and fall foul winning openings 601. It is possible to win a prize.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the outer rail 62, and is thereafter guided to the game area along the outer rail 62. In other words, in the first modified example, since the launched game balls pass through the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the launched game balls pass through the inner side of the launch path where the launched game balls cannot enter. Is provided with a second opening.

  As described above, in the first modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, it is not necessary to provide the guide member 605.

  The foul sphere generated on the end side of the firing path 701 flows down the firing path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602.

  As described above, in the first modified example, in the configuration in which the foul winning opening 601 in which the foul ball can enter is provided in order to allow the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a to smoothly reach the game area. There is no need to add a new configuration. Further, even in the case of a game ball that has reached the game area, it is possible to handle a game ball that has a very low firing intensity and is fired at a position that is not suitable for a game, like a foul ball. In order to more reliably guide the foul ball generated above the second opening 604 to the second opening 604, the second opening 604 may be provided at the upper left chord position. By doing so, the falling of the foul ball by its own weight acts, and the foul ball flows down to the second opening 604 more reliably.

<Second modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 are removed, and FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a foul ball entering path 606. The second modified example is different from the first embodiment described above in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the second modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is directed to the foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. Further, a foul ball entering path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of acrylic resin having high transparency, and is configured so that a player can visually recognize a game ball flowing on the back side of the game board 13.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the outer rail 62, and is thereafter guided to the game area along the outer rail 62. In other words, in the second modified example, since the launched game balls pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the launched game balls pass through the inner side of the launch path on which the launched game balls cannot enter. Is provided with a second opening.

  As described above, in the second modification, the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, so that the guide member 605 does not need to be provided.

  The foul sphere generated on the end side of the firing path 701 flows down the firing path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602. Next, a configuration in which a game ball guided by the guide member 602 flows down to a foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area will be described with reference to FIG.

  30A is an enlarged view of a region XXIX in FIG. 29, FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view taken along a line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing in the XXXb-XXXb line of FIG. The foul sphere generated on the end side of the firing area 701 flows down between the guide member 602 and the inner rail 61 and is guided on the ball receiving member 606a. The ball receiving member 606a has a downward inclination toward the right side, that is, the direction toward the inner rail 61 in the front view of FIG. 30A, and a downward inclination toward the second opening 604 provided in the game board 13. (See FIG. 30C). Therefore, the game ball on the ball receiving member 606a passes through the second opening 604 provided in the game board 13 along the formed downward slope (see FIG. 30B). The game ball that has passed through the second opening 604 rolls on the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board 13 and is discharged from the outlet 600d provided in the game area of the game board 13 to the game area, where the foul ball wins. Guided to mouth 601. In the second modified example, the game board is formed of acrylic resin having high permeability, and the passage 606c is also formed of the same member. It is configured to be visible from the side.

  By providing a structure for guiding the foul ball to the foul winning opening 601 on the back side of the game board 13 instead of the front face as in the second modification, a limited front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area , It will be easier to incorporate ideas to improve the interest of the game.

  In the second modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the foul winning opening 601 is provided in the game area of the game board 13, but may be provided in another place. . For example, the second opening 604 may be provided on the outer peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the foul winning opening 601 may be provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 32). By doing so, there is no need to provide a foul winning port 601 for allowing a foul ball to enter a game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at the foul winning opening 601.

  Further, the launch path 701 is configured to have a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the game balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a have one game ball on the back side (the game board 13 side). You may comprise so that it can be fired in the state which maintained the space | interval which can pass a ball. In this way, when an opening is provided in the game board 13, the width direction of the firing path 701 can be narrowed, and the left-right direction (width direction) of the game board 13 can be used effectively. I can do it.

<Third Modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The third modified example is different from the first embodiment described above in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the third modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the foul sphere flowing down the second opening 604 is formed between the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. The ball passes through the second opening 604 formed therebetween and enters the foul winning opening 601.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the outer rail 62, and is thereafter guided to the game area along the outer rail 62. In other words, in the third modified example, since the launched game balls pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the launched game balls cannot pass through the inner side of the launch path where the launched game balls cannot enter. Is provided with a second opening.

  As described above, in the second modification, the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, so that the guide member 605 does not need to be provided.

  Further, the inner rail 61 is divided into a first inner rail 61a and a second inner rail 61b, and a gap such that a game ball can pass through one ball is formed by a lower end portion of the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. By forming the second opening 604, the gap can form the second opening 604, and the foul ball can enter the foul winning opening 601 without using the guide member 602.

<Fourth modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fourth modified example is a further modified example of the second modified example described above, and is different in that the position of the second opening 604, the position of the foul winning opening 601 is changed, and a guide member 605 is added. It is otherwise identical. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the fourth modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 in the foul winning. The ball enters the mouth 601. Further, a foul ball entering path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of acrylic resin having high transparency, and is configured so that a player can visually recognize a game ball flowing on the back side of the game board 13. Further, since the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board is provided from the left end to the right end of the game board 13, the game ball path from the ball launching unit 112a to the foul winning opening 601 is provided in the game area. It can be made longer than the mouth (not shown), and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the foul winning opening 601.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605, after which the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 and the game area. It is led to. That is, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. The foul sphere generated on the terminal end side in the firing path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the firing path 701 due to its own weight.

  By providing a structure for guiding a foul ball to the foul winning opening 601 on the back side of the game board 13 instead of the front face as in the fourth modification, a limited front space of the game board 13, that is, a range of the game area is provided. , It will be easier to incorporate ideas to improve the interest of the game.

  By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a foul winning opening 601 for allowing a foul ball to enter a game area provided on the front face of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at the foul winning opening 601.

<Fifth modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fifth modified example is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the position at which the ball launching unit 903 is installed is changed and the change accompanying the change is performed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the pachinko machine 10 described in the fifth modified example, the game balls used for the game are collected by the collection path 901, and the collected game balls are fired at the upper left of the pachinko machine 10 by the lifting lift 902. This is a gaming machine of a system in which a game ball is discharged to a unit 903 and a shooting ball is fired to a game area by a firing solenoid 904.

  In such a pachinko machine 10, there is no need to provide a firing path 701 for allowing a game ball to reach a game area, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be utilized as a game area to the maximum. However, since the game ball is fired from the firing solenoid provided at the upper left of the pachinko machine 10, there is no space for providing a member (the firing rail 801 in the first embodiment) for stabilizing the fired game ball. There is a possibility that the game balls that are fired may vary. Therefore, a foul winning opening 601 is provided in a specific area in which a game ball not suitable for a game flows in the game area. By doing in this way, even if the player has aimed at a predetermined location, the player can play the game again without having to use a single game ball that has been fired to a specific area other than the predetermined location. You can do so.

<Sixth modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. A sixth modification is a function (so-called replay function) of causing the foul ball winning port 601 to perform a game again as a result of a game by a game ball falling under its own weight in the game area in addition to the purpose of entering the foul ball. ), And is a pachinko machine 10 capable of providing new gaming properties. The sixth modified example is a further modified example of the above-described first modified example, in which the second opening 604, the number of the guide members 602, and a game ball falling by its own weight in the game area 602 enters the foul winning opening 601. The difference is that the path to the ball is changed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the sixth modified example, a plurality of (two) second openings 604 are provided, and the ball is generated by the ball firing unit 112a by branching the foul sphere generated in the firing path 701 from the firing path 701 quickly. It prevents collision with game balls. Also, a buffer member 608 for preventing the game ball dropped by its own weight from the game area from entering the firing path 701 from the second opening 604 and preventing the guide member 602 from being damaged is provided in the second opening 604. Is provided.

  A description will be given of a flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 characteristic of the sixth modification. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605, after which the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 and the game area. It is led to. That is, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. The foul sphere generated on the terminal end side in the firing path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the firing path 701 due to its own weight.

  Although a plurality of modified examples have been described above, other configurations may be used without being limited thereto. For example, the members constituting the foul winning opening 601 may be integrally provided on the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 constituting the launching path 701, or the foul winning opening 601 may be provided within the launching path 701.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first to sixth modifications which are modifications of the first embodiment and the first embodiment described above, a foul winning opening 601 in which a foul ball can enter is provided, and a firing intensity that does not reach the game area is provided. The launched game ball is configured to be returned to the player by a prize ball based on the ball entering the foul winning opening 601.

  In the first embodiment described above, it is configured such that an improper act such as illegally entering the foul winning opening 601 can be detected based on the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 and the number of launched game balls. ing. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the control processing of the first embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the emission intensity is adjusted to be a foul sphere.

  Specifically, in a game state (right-handed game state) on which it is assumed that the game area is fired to the right side of the game area, such as a probable change game state or a time reduction game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 moves the game ball to the right side of the game area. When the intensity is insufficient to fire (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the firing intensity in which the game ball to be fired becomes a foul ball (in this control example, the operation amount corresponds to 20%) To the desired firing intensity).

  This prevents the game ball from being fired to the left side of the game area due to a player's operation error or the like despite the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed or unintentionally won. Disadvantage, such as inviting the player, can be suppressed.

<Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a part of the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is changed, and the other points are the same. Specifically, the difference is that a firing permission flag 203r and a handle operation amount 203s are newly provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The other points are the same, and the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The firing permission flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not firing is permitted. When the firing permission flag 203r is on, it indicates that firing is permitted. On the other hand, when the firing permission flag 203r is off, , Indicating that firing is not allowed. The firing permission flag 203r is turned on when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110. (S222 in FIG. 36). It is referred to in the firing control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interruption process of the main control device 110, and when the firing permission flag 203r is on, in order to fire the game ball from the ball firing unit 112a. , And transmits the firing command to the payout control device 111. Upon receiving the firing command, the payout control device 111 transmits a firing command based on the command to the firing control device 112, and the firing control device 112 causes the ball firing unit to fire a game ball based on the received firing command. 112a is controlled.

  The operation amount storage area 203s is an area for storing the operation amount of the operation handle 51, and stores a value of 0 to 100. This value indicates the operation position (angle from the origin position) with respect to the movable range (movable angle) of the operation handle 51 in percentage. For example, if the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 0, it indicates that the operation handle 51 is not operated (the position of the origin), and if the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 100, the operation handle 51 is not. 51 indicates that it is fully opened (operable upper limit position).

  In the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110, the manipulated variable storage area 203s is used when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off. The above-described firing permission flag 203r is set to ON (see S222 in FIG. 36), and the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (see S223 in FIG. 36). The firing command is set based on the value of the operation amount storage area 203s, which is referred to in the firing control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (see S2005 in FIG. 37). ). Further, in the present control example, when the game is in the right-handed gaming state and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80, it is determined that the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 20, and the firing command is issued. Is set. Accordingly, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area (in the present control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the game ball to be fired is fouled. The firing intensity can be adjusted to be a sphere (in this control example, the operation amount is 20%).

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, a control process of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a part of the switch reading process and the emission control process is changed, and the other portions are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 36, details of the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S101). The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the firing permission flag 203r and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s are set based on the state of the touch sensor 51a and the stop flag 51b. Different, the other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the switch reading process, first, the processes of S201 to S206 are executed as in the first embodiment. Next, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 51a is on (S220). In the processing of S220, when it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is not turned on (S220: No), it is a case where the game ball is about to be fired without being based on the operation of the player, and the game ball is illegally fired. Since it is highly likely that the game ball is about to be fired, the process from S221 to SS223 is skipped so as not to allow the launch of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

  On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is on (S220: Yes), it means that the game ball is about to be fired based on the operation of the player. It is determined whether or not 51b is off (S221). In the processing of S221, if it is determined that the stop switch 51b is on (S221), the player has turned on the stop switch 51b to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball. Then, the process of S222 and SS223 is skipped so as not to permit the launch of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

  In the process of S221, when it is determined that the stop switch 51 is off (S221: No), the process proceeds to the process of S222 to permit the launch of the game ball. In the process of S222, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON (S222), the value of the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (S223), and the process proceeds to S207.

  In the process of S207, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the process of reading the other switches is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the launch control process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the firing control process (S108). The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that, when the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state, the configuration is such that the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted, and other parts are the same. It is. As for the same part, there is a part in which the details of the processing are clearly shown in the present control example, and that part is also described.

  In the firing control process, first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag 203r is on (S2001). As described above, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON when the touch sensor 51a is ON and the stop switch 51b is OFF in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) ( See S222 in FIG. 36).

  In the processing of S2001, when it is determined that the firing permission flag 203r is turned off (S2001: No), when there is no operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, or when the game ball is being illegally fired, etc. Since the game ball is not fired, the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the firing permission flag 203r is ON (S2001: Yes), the processing shifts to the processing of S2002 in order to fire a game ball. In the process of S2002, it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (S2002). More specifically, in the present control example, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A (16R probability change jackpot) is completed, the probability change game state is given by setting the probability change flag 203e to ON, and the jackpot B (16R time reduction jackpot) After the end of the jackpot game based on, the time-saving game state is given by setting the time-saving medium counter 203f to 100. In the probable change game state or the time reduction game state, since the player enters a right-handed game state in which the player plays a game by firing a game ball to the right side of the game area, the probability change flag 203e is turned on or the counter 203f during the time reduction is set. It is determined whether or not the game is in the right-handed gaming state depending on whether it is 1 or more.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the game is not in the right-handed gaming state (S2002: No), a firing command is set based on the value of the operation amount storage area 203s in order to execute normal firing control. Move on to processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the game is in the right-handed game state (S2002: Yes), the operation amount storage area 203s is determined in order to determine whether or not the firing intensity of the game ball needs to be adjusted. Is determined to be in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003). Here, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is less than 30 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is less than 30%), the firing intensity is weak, and the launched game ball does not reach the game area. In this case, the ball enters the foul winning opening 601. When the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 80 or more (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 80% or more), the shooting intensity is high, and the shot game ball is fired to the right side of the game area. Is the case.

  When the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 30% or more and less than 80%), although the launched game ball reaches the game area, This is a case where the shot is fired to the left of the game area without reaching (or difficult to reach) the right of the game area.

  Therefore, in the processing of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: Yes), the firing command is set with the value of the operation amount storage area as 20 (S2003). S2004), and proceeds to the processing of S2006. Accordingly, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is the operation amount (30% to 80%) at which the shot game ball is fired to the left side of the game area, the operation amount is adjusted to 20%. The game ball is fired at the fired intensity (ie, the fired intensity that becomes a foul ball). Therefore, in the right-handed game state, the game ball is unnecessarily fired to the left side of the game area, and unintended winning can be prevented. Further, the game ball that has become a foul ball enters the foul winning opening 601 and is returned as a prize ball (one ball), so that unnecessary game balls are fired (launched to the left side of the game area). ), The game balls are not unnecessarily consumed.

  In the present control example, the firing intensity is adjusted to 20%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The firing intensity adjusted to be a foul ball and to enter the foul winning opening 601 may be appropriately changed. . In addition, since the firing intensity to be fired to the right side of the game area and the firing intensity to be a foul ball may vary depending on the configuration of the game board 13, for example, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 40 to 70 Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the emission intensity is adjusted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2003 that the value of the manipulated variable storage area 203s is not in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: No), the firing intensity is weak, and the fired game ball does not reach the game area, and When the ball enters the winning opening 601, or when the launching intensity is high and the launched game ball is launched to the right of the game area, the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is set to execute the normal launch control. Is set based on the command, and the process proceeds to S2006.

  When the processing of S2004 or S2005 is completed, the firing permission flag 203r is set to off (S2006), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in the right-handed game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area (in this control example, the operation amount is Is equal to or less than 80%), the firing intensity is adjusted to the firing intensity at which the game ball to be fired becomes a foul ball (in the present control example, the firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount of 20%). This prevents the game ball from being fired to the left side of the game area due to a player's operation error or the like despite the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed or unintentionally won. Disadvantage, such as inviting the player, can be suppressed.

  Further, in a game state (for example, a right-hit state) in which a direction in which the game ball is fired is provided in the game area by providing a winning opening of one prize ball, the game ball is fired in a direction other than the specified direction. As long as the firing intensity is set, the firing control process may forcibly change the firing intensity to the firing intensity at which the winning ball enters the winning opening of one ball. As described above, while the firing intensity is being corrected by the firing control process, the game guidance may be provided to the player so that the operation of the operation handle 51 may have the correct firing intensity. By doing so, the player can quickly operate the operation handle 51 so as to have an appropriate firing intensity.

  In the present control example, the main control device 110 is configured to adjust the firing intensity. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The firing control device 112 may adjust the firing intensity, or the payout control device 111 may adjust the firing intensity. You may do it. Thus, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, in the case of the right-handed game state, the configuration is such that the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the left-handed game state, the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted. In this manner, the game ball may be fired to the right side of the game area due to a player's operation error or the like, or the firing intensity adjusted according to the game state may be changed (for example, during a left-handed game. Adjusted to be left-handed and adjusted to right-handed during right-handed games).

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the firing intensity is adjusted according to the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the firing intensity may be adjusted according to the state of the ball firing unit 112a. Specifically, the sphere launching unit 112a is not ready to launch a sphere (such as a transient response of an electric element or a delay due to control processing). For example, even though the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 60%. If the game ball can only be fired at a firing intensity of 50%, the firing intensity is adjusted to 20% so that the ball becomes a foul ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being fired into the game area at a firing intensity not intended by the player, and to suppress disadvantages to the player such as unnecessary consumption of the game balls or unintentional winning. can do.

  Further, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A) is given, the above-described adjustment of the emission intensity may be performed. Thereby, the variation of the privilege given by the jackpot can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Although the main controller 110 performs the output process based on various determination processes in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, all the output information is output from the sound lamp controller 113 or the external output terminal board 261. When the determination process is performed by a device other than the main control device 110, all information based on the determination result is output to the sound lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261. It is configured to be possible. The output information can be notified to the outside so as to be identifiable. As means for performing the notification, various devices (LCD, speaker, etc.) connected to the sound lamp control device 113 or directly to the main control device 110 can be used. There are display units and the like that are connected.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  All or some of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined and configured. In addition, although the main control device 110 and the sub-control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 are configured, the present invention is not limited thereto, and all functions may be integrated into the main control device 110.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Fahl ball winning)
A game area in which the game ball can flow down, a launching means for firing the game ball toward the game area, and a path capable of guiding the launch ball fired by the launching means to the game area. A launch path, guiding means for guiding a game ball of the launch sphere flowing backward through the launch path without reaching the game area from the launch path to a specific area, and a game guided to the specific area A specific ball entry means capable of entering a ball, and an assigning means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time a game ball enters the specific ball entry means A gaming machine A1 characterized by the following.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a launching device for launching a game ball to a game area, and a game ball (a so-called foul ball) that has not reached the game area among the game balls fired by the firing means. Ball recovery device for recovering the ball). There is known a gaming machine in which a game ball collected by the ball collection device flows down a ball path provided in the game machine and is returned to a player again (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-308730). In this case, it is necessary to separately provide a ball path for returning the foul ball to the player, and a space for providing a dedicated ball path for returning the foul ball to the player is limited to a limited space in the gaming machine. There is a problem in that the inside of the gaming machine becomes complicated to secure it. In addition, there is a problem that the manufacturing cost increases.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path without reaching the game area is made to enter the specific ball entry means, and a game value equivalent to at least the one ball is entered based on the entered ball. Since it is possible to provide the ball to the player, it is not necessary to separately provide a ball path for returning the foul ball to the player in the gaming machine, and the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified. Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing a dedicated ball path for returning the foul ball to the player in the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine A1, the guiding means has a guiding piece that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the specific area and a second state in which guiding of the gaming ball to the specific area is controlled. Is always arranged on the firing path in the first state, and can be changed to the second state by abutting a game ball fired from the firing means to the game area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, when the game ball fired from the firing means to the game area comes into contact with the guidance means, the guidance means is changed to the second state in which the guidance to the specific area is regulated. A situation in which the launched game ball is guided to a specific area can be prevented. Therefore, there is an effect that a foul ball can be guided to a specific area without hindering a normal game.

  In the gaming machine A2, a specific opening communicating with the specific region is formed in the firing path, and the guide piece is arranged at a position for guiding the game ball flowing back to the specific opening in the second state. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being executed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the guidance means is in the second state of restricting a game ball fired from the firing means to the game area from being guided to the specific area. Also, there is an effect that the foul sphere can be guided to a specific area.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, storage means having a storage portion capable of storing game balls to be supplied to the launch means, and supply means capable of supplying game balls from the storage means to the launch means. The gaming machine A4, wherein the giving means pays out one or more game balls to the storage means as the game value.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, it is possible to use a mechanism for paying out game balls based on entering a winning hole, which is conventionally provided in a gaming machine, and has an effect that the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified. In addition, since the shooting ball can be fired again without touching the provided game ball, there is an effect that the player does not feel troublesome.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the providing means pays out one game ball each time one game ball enters the specific entering means. .

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, one game ball is paid out each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that the player feels uncomfortable. Has the effect that it can be prevented from being given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine has a payout channel through which the game ball paid out by the providing means flows down, and the payout channel pays out based on the ball entering the specific ball inputting means. A first flow path through which the discharged game balls flow, and at least a second flow path that guides the flowing game balls to the storage means differently from the first flow path, wherein the first flow path A gaming machine A6 formed to guide a game ball to the launching means without passing through the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, there is an effect that the game ball provided by the specific ball entry means can be immediately fired.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes a game board having the game area, and a frame configured to be detachable from the game board, and the launching unit is disposed on the frame, The gaming machine A7, wherein the specific area is formed on the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, the foul ball generated on the game board side enters the specific ball entry means in the specific area provided on the game board, and the game ball provided by the providing means is fired by the firing means. Therefore, there is no need to provide a return path for foul balls that straddles the game board and the frame as in the related art, and there is an effect that the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine A7, the storage means, at least a part of the providing means, the first flow path, and the second flow path are arranged in the frame. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7. That is, it is possible to complete the path within the frame until the game ball provided by the providing means is fired by the firing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the launching path is formed by a wall that is formed in an arc shape and faces each other with a width that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. Of the part, the game ball is fired to the game area along the outer peripheral wall portion, and the guiding means is configured to cause the game ball flowing backward along the firing path along the inner circumferential side to the specific area. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that the gaming machine A9 is directed to the game machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, there is an effect that a collision between a foul ball and a gaming ball fired by the firing means can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine A9, the gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the wall portion is such that the inner peripheral wall portion is formed shorter than the outer peripheral wall portion.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that the foul ball can be efficiently guided to the specific area.

  In the gaming machine A1, the launching path is configured to have a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction of the game ball, and the launching unit launches the game ball into the game area. A game machine A11 that shoots a game ball along a path that allows one ball to pass through to the depth side.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, there is an effect that a collision between a foul ball and a gaming ball fired by the firing means can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine A11, the launching means is capable of launching with a launching force at which the game ball can reach the game area along a path through which one game ball can pass to the depth side. A gaming machine A12 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A11, there is an effect that the game ball can be fired so that the foul ball does not collide with the game ball fired by the firing means.

<Characteristic B group> (Detecting the passage of a game ball to determine an abnormality)
A game area in which game balls can flow down, a firing means capable of firing game balls toward the game area, and a firing path having a path capable of guiding a fire ball fired by the fire means to the game area; First detecting means capable of detecting the shooting sphere, second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball of the shooting sphere flowing backward through the firing path before reaching the game area, and the first detection Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result of the means and the detection result of the second detecting means; and output means for outputting information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition by the determining means. A gaming machine B1.

  Here, conventionally, a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. Is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game in which a privilege is obtained in an amount equal to or greater than the number of game balls fired by the firing device is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the launch ball and the foul ball are detected, and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result, information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be monitored that the illegal game has been performed based on the output information.

  In the gaming machine B1, the predetermined condition is that the second detecting means has detected a gaming ball, even though the first detecting means has not detected a gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor a fraudulent game in which a foul ball is detected even though a gaming ball has not been fired.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the game machine B1 or B2 is provided with a time measuring means capable of measuring a predetermined time, and time measuring start means for starting the time measurement by the time measuring means, wherein the determining means performs the predetermined time after the time measurement is started by the time measuring start means. A game machine B3 for determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the game.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2. In other words, the determination can be made in consideration of the time difference between the timing at which the game ball fired by the firing means is detected and the timing at which the game ball is detected as a foul ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B3, the timing start means starts timing when the second detecting means detects a game ball, and the predetermined condition is a predetermined time period measured by the timing means. A gaming machine B4 wherein the second detecting means detects a game ball.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B3, there is no need to perform the normal clock operation, and there is an effect that unnecessary processing can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, among the game balls fired by the shooting means, the game balls that flow backward in the shooting path before reaching the game area are guided from the shooting path to a specific area. A gaming machine B5 comprising a guiding unit, wherein the second detecting unit is provided in the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, there is an effect that only the foul ball can be reliably detected.

  The gaming machine B5, further comprising a branch port for branching a game ball from the launch path to the specific area, wherein the first detection means is provided immediately before the branch port on the launch path. Machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5. That is, the foul sphere generated in the firing path passes through the branching opening and is guided to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the first detecting means does not detect the game ball flowing backward in the firing path, and can surely detect the game ball fired by the firing means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B6, the second detection unit detects a ball entering a specific ball entry unit in which a game ball that has flowed back on the launch path before reaching the game area can enter the ball before reaching the game area. A gaming machine B7 for detecting, provided each time a gaming ball is detected by the second detecting means, an imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to at least one ball.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, there is an effect that the second detecting means can be shared with the means for detecting the entry into the specific entering means.

<Characteristic C group> (Abnormal monitoring by counting foul balls)
A launch path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, launching means capable of firing game balls in the play area, and a path capable of guiding launch balls fired by the launch means to the play area. Detecting means for detecting, among the launched balls, gaming balls flowing backward in the firing path before reaching the game area; and counting means for counting the backward flowing gaming balls based on the detection result of the detecting means. A gaming machine C1 comprising: and output means for outputting information based on the fact that the counting result by the counting means within a predetermined period has become the predetermined counting result.

  Here, conventionally, a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. Is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game in which a privilege is obtained in an amount equal to or greater than the number of game balls fired by the firing device is performed.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the following effects are obtained. That is, it is possible to count the foul balls and output information based on the fact that the count result is a predetermined count result. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be monitored that the illegal game has been performed based on the output information.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the counting result by the counting means becomes a first counting result which is predetermined as the predetermined counting result, the first counting result is obtained without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined period. A gaming machine C2 for outputting information based on the fact that the game machine has become a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the count result becomes the first count result, information can be output immediately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to immediately grasp that the illegal game is being played.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the second counting result in which the counting result by the counting means within the predetermined period is smaller than the first counting result predetermined as the predetermined counting result A game machine C3 for outputting information based on the result of the second counting when it becomes.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, there is an effect that both a short-term illegal game and a long-term illegal game can be monitored.

  Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a launching ball detecting unit capable of detecting a launching ball fired by the launching unit, and a launching ball counting unit counting the launching ball based on a detection result of the launching ball detecting unit. Wherein the output means outputs information based on the fact that the counting result by the counting means within a predetermined time period is greater than the counting result by the shooting sphere counting means. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, it is possible to compare the result of counting the foul balls counted within the predetermined period with the result of counting the game balls fired by the firing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the game machine C4 further includes a correction number calculation unit that calculates a correction number obtained by adding a predetermined number to the result of the counting by the number of shot spheres, and the output unit outputs the result of the counting by the counting unit within a predetermined period. A gaming machine C5 for outputting information based on an increase in the number of corrections.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4. That is, even if a foul sphere that has passed through the launching ball detection means but has not passed through the detection means has occurred, a correction is performed by adding a predetermined number as an allowable error range so as not to be judged as abnormal. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (Structure measures for incoming ball security)
A launch path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, firing means capable of firing game balls in the game area, and a path capable of guiding the game balls fired by the fire means to the game area. An opening through which a game ball that has not reached the game area provided on the launch path and that has flowed back through the launch path can enter, and a game ball into which the game ball entered the opening can enter Means, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, an assigning means for assigning a game value equivalent to the entered game ball to the player, and directing the firing path from below the opening. A gaming machine D1 having a protruding piece that protrudes.

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area, and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, in order to obtain a privilege equal to or greater than the number of game balls fired by the firing device, an illegal game is performed in which a game ball with a thread is manipulated to detect a plurality of entering balls. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine D1, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal game to be played by the protruding piece with which the thread attached to the game ball comes into contact.

  In the gaming machine D1, the projecting piece has a substantially opening width of the opening, and is arranged so as to protrude to a position facing the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, there is an effect that the thread can be reliably brought into contact.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the protruding piece is formed of an elastic body, and when receiving the reversing game ball, receives the reversing game ball and guides the game ball to the opening. A gaming machine D3, which is elastically deformed in the opposite direction based on the fact that an external force greater than that received from the counterflowing gaming ball is received in the direction opposite to the firing direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, since the protruding piece with which the thread-like body abuts is elastically deformed, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal game to be performed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a gaming machine D4 is provided with a cutting means having a predetermined cutting force at least at a distal end of the projecting piece.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, there is an effect that an illegal game can be prevented by enabling the cutting means to cut the thread.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the game machine has a guide flow path which is communicated with the opening and guides the game ball entered from the opening to the ball entry means to the ball entry means. A gaming machine D5, wherein a protruding portion protruding from the opening side is formed in the game machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for an illegal game to be performed by providing a plurality of portions where the thread comes into contact.

  In the gaming machine D5, the ball entry means is arranged such that the protruding portion is located above a ball entry portion where the game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D5, there is an effect that a portion where the thread-shaped body can be reliably brought into contact can be provided.

  In the gaming machine D5 or D6, a specific cutting unit having a cutting force is provided at one end of the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5 or D6, there is an effect that the illegal cutting can be prevented by enabling the thread to be cut by the specific cutting means.

  In the gaming machine D3, the elastic body detects that the game ball passes through the firing path based on that an external force greater than that received from the counter-flowed game ball is received in a direction opposite to a firing direction of the game ball. A gaming machine D8 that is elastically deformed to a regulating position to regulate.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. In other words, even if there is a player who is performing an illegal game while playing a normal game so that it is not found that the illegal play is being performed, the projecting piece is elastically deformed so as to close the firing path by operating the thread. Therefore, the game ball fired by the firing means does not normally reach the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult to simultaneously perform the illegal game and the normal game.

<Characteristic E group> (monitoring the failure of the launch device)
A game area in which the game ball can flow down, the firing intensity is variable, and a firing means capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area when fired at a predetermined firing intensity, and Launch instruction means for instructing to launch at an arbitrary launch intensity; a launch path having a path capable of guiding a game ball launched by the launch means to the game area; and Of the game balls fired by the specific ball input means capable of entering a game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path before reaching the game area, and an instruction that is equal to or higher than the predetermined firing intensity by the firing instruction means. A game machine E1 comprising: abnormality processing execution means for executing abnormality processing when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a ball entering the specific ball entry means when the game is performed.

  Here, a gaming machine that drops a game ball fired by the launching device in the game area and grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters a winning opening provided in the game area is provided. It is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, if a failure occurs in the launching device, the player cannot launch the gaming machine at a desired position, and there is a possibility that the privilege is not given.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when a condition based on entering a specific ball entry means capable of entering a foul ball is satisfied, even though a launch instruction is issued at a launch intensity reaching the game area, Abnormal processing can be made executable. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the launching means can be monitored.

  In the gaming machine E1, an operating means operable by a player and variable control means for varying the firing intensity specified by the firing instruction means based on an operation amount of the operating means are provided. Gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, there is an effect that a failure of the launching unit can be monitored also in a gaming machine provided with the operation unit and the variable control unit.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, counting means for counting the number of game balls hit by the specific hitting means, and judging means for judging whether or not the counting means has counted a predetermined number or more of balls in a predetermined period. The gaming machine E3, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of incoming balls equal to or more than the predetermined number is counted by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, it is conceivable that a game ball fired by the firing means accidentally enters the specific ball-entering means due to a factor other than a malfunction of the firing means. However, if a failure occurs in the launching means, that state is continued. Therefore, by executing the abnormality process when the number of incoming balls equal to or more than the predetermined number is counted, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring the failure of the firing means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, determining means for determining whether or not the firing intensity indicated by the variable control means has been changed, and until a predetermined period has elapsed based on the determination made by the determining means as being changed. A game machine E4 having a regulation means for regulating the execution of the abnormal processing.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3. That is, immediately after the shooting intensity is changed by a sudden operation, game balls having different speeds pass through the shooting path, and thus the shot game balls may collide. That is, even if the launching means is normal, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the launch specific entering means. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the abnormal processing until a predetermined period elapses after the emission intensity is changed, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring the failure of the emission means can be improved.

  The gaming machine E5 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, wherein the abnormality processing executing means executes, as the abnormality processing, a process of outputting an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, there is an effect that an abnormal signal relating to a malfunction of the launching device can be output to the outside.

  The gaming machine E6 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the abnormality processing executing means reports, as the abnormality processing, a notification mode indicating an abnormality.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, there is an effect that a failure in launching and sending can be notified to the outside.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, having game value giving means for giving a game value equivalent to one game ball to a player based on a game ball having entered the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine E7, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects can be achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6. That is, a game value can be provided by using a specific ball entry means used for detecting a malfunction of the launching device. Therefore, there is an effect that means for detecting a game ball can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the abnormality processing execution means executes the abnormality processing when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means when an operation amount of the operation means is equal to or more than a predetermined operation amount. A gaming machine E8,

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor a failure of the launching unit under specific conditions.

  A determination unit that determines that the game machine is in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in any of the gaming machines E5 to E8, wherein the abnormality processing execution unit performs the abnormality processing based on a determination result of the determination unit A gaming machine E9 characterized by different contents.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E8, the content of the abnormal process can be varied depending on the gaming state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to raise the priority of the abnormal signal during the jackpot.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination unit continuously determines that the predetermined number or more of the incoming balls have been counted. Gaming machine E10.

  According to the gaming machine E10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E3 to E9. In other words, if a failure occurs in the launching means, the state continues unless the firing means is repaired, and therefore, the determination is made continuously by the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring the malfunction of the firing means can be improved.

<Feature F group> (Replay when a game ball is fired to an unintended position)
A game area in which the game ball can flow down, a firing means capable of firing the game ball toward the game area, the firing intensity being variable according to the supplied electric energy, and a first operation based on a predetermined operation. Launch instructing means for instructing to launch at the launch intensity of the first launch intensity when the supplied amount of power is less than the amount of power required to launch at the first launch intensity Launch intensity correcting means for correcting the firing intensity to a lower than the lower second firing intensity, and launching a game ball at the second firing intensity or less corrected by the firing intensity correcting means. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a specific ball entry means; and an assigning means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time a game ball enters the specific ball entry means. .

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine having a game property of adjusting the firing intensity of the firing device and aiming at a predetermined position in the game area when a specific state (big hit state) is reached (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). No.). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball is fired at a place other than a predetermined position during the above-described specific state, the game ball is merely consumed wastefully, and such a game ball is fired by the player. Was dissatisfied.

  According to the gaming machine F1, if the game ball cannot be fired at the firing intensity specified by the firing instruction means, the shooting intensity is corrected to a lower firing intensity, and the game ball is fired at the corrected firing intensity. Become. Then, a game value equivalent to the fired game ball is given, so that the game ball is not consumed unnecessarily. Therefore, there is an effect that the dissatisfaction of the player can be eliminated.

  In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball entry means is provided in a guiding portion in which, out of the shot balls fired by the shooting means, game balls that have flowed back in the shooting path without reaching the game area are guided, The gaming machine F2, wherein the second firing intensity is lower than the firing intensity required for the shooting sphere to reach the game area.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, the game ball fired with the corrected firing intensity enters the specific ball entry means without reaching the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value equivalent to the shot waste ball can be reliably given to the player without affecting the game in the game area.

  In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball entry means is provided in a specific area of the game area where game balls fired at the first firing intensity are difficult to enter, and the second firing intensity is A gaming machine F3, wherein the launching sphere is stronger than the launching intensity required to reach the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, a game ball fired with the corrected firing intensity can enter a specific ball entry means provided in the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that a game value equivalent to the useless ball shot using the ball entry means provided in the game area can be given to the player.

  The gaming machine F2 further includes an abnormality determining unit that determines an abnormality based on a ball entering the specific ball entry unit, and the specific ball entry unit while the firing intensity is being corrected by the firing intensity correction unit. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that entering the ball is excluded from the determination of the abnormality.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the result of intentionally entering the specific entrance is excluded from the determination by the abnormality determining means, so that the accuracy of the abnormality determining means is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the firing unit includes an operation unit capable of changing a firing intensity to a first firing intensity by performing a pressing operation, and the predetermined operation includes operating the operation unit. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the supply of the required amount of electric power to the launching means is performed in response to the operation of the operation unit whose emission intensity changes by a simple operation. There is an effect that it is possible to cope with a situation in which it is not in time.

  A gaming machine F6 comprising output means for outputting information based on the fact that the emission intensity correction means corrects the emission intensity in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, by outputting information based on the fact that the shooting is being performed with the corrected intensity, for example, the player can grasp. Is displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused.

  The gaming machine F7, further comprising: a notifying unit that gives a notification in a manner recognizable by a player based on the information output by the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F6, since the player can recognize that the shooting is being performed with the corrected intensity, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused. This has the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, specific entry information based on the entry of a game ball into the specific entry unit, and entry based on the entry of a game ball into the entry unit provided in the game area A gaming machine F8 comprising external output means capable of outputting information to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. That is, by outputting the incoming ball information and the specific incoming ball information, respectively, the information receiving side obtains the incoming ball information obtained as a result of the game and the incoming ball information obtained in the sense of returning the game ball to the player. And can be managed separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the situation of the gaming machine can be accurately determined.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display unit is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
51 Operating handle (firing means)
110 Main controller (judgment means)
205 I / O port (output means)
208a Foul winning switch (second detecting means)
208b Launch ball detection switch (first detection means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a launching device for launching a game ball to a game area, and a ball collection device for collecting game balls (so-called foul balls) that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired by the firing means. A game machine provided with a game machine is known.
The game balls collected by the ball collection device flow down a dedicated ball path provided in the gaming machine, and are returned to the player again.

JP-A-9-308730

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to secure a space for providing a ball path for returning a foul ball to the player, and there is a problem that the structure in the gaming machine becomes complicated .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of simplifying the structure inside the gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a game area in which a game ball can flow down , firing means for firing the game ball toward the game area, and fired by the fire means. the shot ball and the game area to guide Kukoto capable arcuate outer rail section, and the outer rail section and at a distance, the outer rail section rail portion in which is disposed to face the inner peripheral surface of the , of the shot ball, game ball flowing back a path formed between the inner rail section and the outer rail portion without reaching the game area, the specific ball entrance means capable ball entrance, its Providing means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means, wherein the inner rail portion is a first inner ball disposed downstream. A rail portion, and a second portion disposed upstream of the first inner rail portion. A gap between the second inner rail and the outer rail is set to be greater than a gap between an upper end of the first inner rail and the outer rail; An upper end of a rail portion and a lower end portion of the second inner rail portion are arranged at an interval capable of passing game balls in a horizontal direction, and pass through a gap formed between the upper end portion and the lower end portion. The configured game ball is configured to be able to enter the specific ball entry means .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect , the game area in which the game ball can flow down, firing means for firing the game ball toward the game area, and the shooting ball fired by the shooting means in the game area Arc-shaped outer rail portion that can be guided to an area, an inner rail portion spaced apart from the outer rail portion and disposed opposite an inner peripheral surface of the outer rail portion, and A game ball that has flowed back through a path formed between the outer rail portion and the inner rail portion without reaching the game area is provided with a specific ball entry means capable of entering a ball, and Providing means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time a ball enters the ball, wherein the inner rail portion is provided with a first inner rail portion disposed on the downstream side; And a second inner rail portion located upstream of the first inner rail portion. An interval between the second inner rail portion and the outer rail portion is set to be larger than an interval between an upper end portion of the first inner rail portion and the outer rail portion, and an upper end portion of the first inner rail portion and the outer rail portion. The lower end of the second inner rail portion is disposed at an interval that allows game balls to pass in the horizontal direction, and the game ball that has passed through a gap formed between the upper end and the lower end is the specified ball. Since the ball entry means is configured to be able to enter a ball, there is an effect that the structure inside the gaming machine can be simplified.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame and the lower plate unit were removed. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the pachinko machine in FIG. 2. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the state in which the illegal game in FIG. 3 is performed. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM in the main control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first random number counter C1 and the jackpot determination value, and (b) is the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a second random number counter C4 and a hit in a normal symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of a big hit. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation type at the time of deviation (normal), and (d) is the variation type counter CS1 at the time of deviation (probable variation). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a variable and a variation type. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an external output process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the incoming-ball abnormality determination process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 2nd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 3rd modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 4th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 5th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which removed the front frame and the lower plate unit in the 6th modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing typically contents of RAM of a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows switch reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows launch control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a foul ball entry path 606, FIG. 4 is an operation explanatory diagram when a threaded game ball enters the foul ball entry path 606, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 2) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail 801 and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 having a function of storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, lending balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and a ball supplied to the upper plate 17 is supplied by the inclination so that the ball is supplied to the ball launching unit 112a. (Not shown), and is guided to the supply ball firing unit 112a. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. And an operation amount detection switch 51c formed by the above. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (the detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) changes in accordance with the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor (the detection result of the operation amount detection switch 51c) that changes according to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51, whereby a jump corresponding to the operation of the player is performed. A ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 by the amount. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is disposed on a rail mounting portion provided on the inner frame 12, and at an inner position of the outer rail 62 Similarly to the outer rail 62, an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a band-shaped metal plate is erected. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The firing area 701 will be described with reference to FIG. The firing area 701 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (partly including the guide member 605) in the left-right direction, and in the front-rear direction by the front surface of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). This is an area, which is a substantially arc-shaped path formed on the left side of the game area with the inner rail 61 therebetween.

  The outer rail 62 is made of a long metal band made of stainless steel, and is mounted on a rail mounting portion formed of a resin (polycarbonate containing fluorine having low frictional resistance) disposed on the inner frame 12. . In particular, the surface facing the inner rail at a predetermined interval is formed of a single metal band, and when the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a passes through the firing path, the metal band The contact is made at the seam so that the launch direction and launch intensity are not affected.

  The outer rail 62 may be planted on the game board 13 similarly to the inner rail 61.

  The launch path 701 is provided to guide game balls fired from a ball launch unit provided in the lower plate unit 15 of the inner frame 12 from above the game board 13 to the game area. A gap 802 is formed between the start end of the firing path 701 and the end of the above-described firing rail 801, and the game ball that has fallen into the gap 802 flows down a foul ball path 800 b described later to the upper plate 17. Is returned. On the other hand, the end of the firing path formed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 has a first opening 603 communicating with the game area, and the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is the first ball. It passes through the opening 603 and reaches the game area.

  The passage width of the firing path 701 has an interval that allows two game balls to pass at the start end, and is formed so as to gradually narrow toward a position where the game ball passes through the guide member 605. At the position where the game ball passes, the width of the passage is narrowed to allow one game ball to pass. Then, after passing through the guide member 605, the width of the game ball is widened again so as to allow two balls to pass therethrough, and is gradually narrowed again toward the end portion from there. The reason why the passage width is reduced at the position where the guide member 605 passes will be described later.

  In the vicinity of the first opening 603, a return ball preventing member 68 is attached. The return ball preventing member 68 prevents the ball guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. The launching path 701 is provided with a second opening 604 serving as an opening of a foul ball entering ball passage 606 described later, and a launching ball detection switch 208b for detecting a game ball passing through the launching path 701. . A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. An arc connecting the rails is provided on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, and is fixed by a resin arc member 70. Have been.

  The ball launching unit 112a is a unitized mechanism that launches a game ball supplied from the upper plate 17 toward a game area provided on the game board 13. The ball firing unit 122a is composed of members such as a firing solenoid, a firing rail 801, a ball feed mechanism, and a positioning member, and is assembled to a base plate formed by pressing a metal flat plate. The base plate on which the members are assembled is fixed to the inner frame 12 with screws.

  If the mounting position of each member constituting the ball launching unit 112a and the mounting position of the ball launching unit 112a to the inner frame have a slight error for each pachinko machine 10, the launch angle of the game ball to the game board 13 and Since the firing intensities differ, high-precision mounting is required. Therefore, the base plate is provided with a fastening hole for attaching each member and a boss for fixing the position of each member, thereby enabling highly accurate attachment. Further, a plurality of (six) screw holes for attaching the base plate to the inner frame are provided, and the base plate can be attached to the inner frame with high accuracy.

  The firing solenoid has a unit configuration in which a linear solenoid is housed in a case member. The firing solenoid is provided with a metal plunger disposed in parallel with the firing rail 801 in the longitudinal direction, and a resin cap that covers the tip of the plunger. As the material of the cap, a polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is employed in the present embodiment. While the player rotates the operation handle 51, the firing solenoid repeats excitation and non-excitation every predetermined time (0.6 seconds), and the plunger reappears correspondingly. . When the plunger protrudes, the game ball positioned on the firing rail 801 by the positioning member described later is fired obliquely upward toward the firing rail. Note that a variable resistor that is linked to the operation handle 51 is connected to the firing solenoid, and the projecting speed of the plunger is adjusted based on the amount of operation of the operation handle 51, so that the firing speed of the game ball and, consequently, the flying distance of the operation handle 51 are controlled. It is adjusted by the amount of rotation.

  The firing rail guides the game ball immediately after being fired by the firing solenoid, and has a predetermined firing angle (20 degrees) so that the game ball is fired toward a firing area 701 provided on the front surface of the game board 13. It had. The firing rail is formed in an M-shaped cross section, and has a shape in which the variation of the game balls is suppressed by passing the game balls through the central groove. Further, in order to suppress variation in game balls and supply more stable game balls to the launch area 701, the length of the launch rail 801 reaches from the launch solenoid mounting position to the upper end of the area covered by the lower plate unit 15. 100 mm. A gap 802, which will be described later, is provided between the end of the firing rail 801 and the firing area 701.

  The ball feed mechanism sends out game balls continuously supplied from the upper plate 17 to the starting end of the firing rail 801 one by one. This ball feed mechanism is mounted on a base plate so as to cover the firing solenoid, and includes a metal piece and an electromagnet for attracting the metal piece inside, and the metal piece is excited by the electromagnet. Has a mechanism that moves upward and moves downward by its own weight when the electromagnet is de-energized. The mechanism is provided with an accommodating portion capable of accommodating one game ball supplied from the upper plate 17 while the metal piece is moving upward. When the electromagnet is de-energized and the metal piece moves downward due to its own weight, the above-described housing communicates with the guide path to the firing rail 801, and the game balls housed in the housing are directed toward the firing rail 801. It flows down.

  The positioning member supports a game ball placed on the starting end of the firing rail 801 and can slightly change the firing position of the game ball. The positioning member is a cylindrical member attached to the base plate by an eccentric shaft, and the distance between the positioning member and the firing rail can be changed by rotating the cylindrical member around the eccentric shaft. It has a configuration that can be used.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, the winning or non-judgment of the special symbol jackpot is performed, and if the special symbol jackpot is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". After the special game state is over, as a value added after the jackpot is over, the game according to these jackpot types (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. In other words, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entry opening 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. And at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided. In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit). After that, in the “big hit A”, the pachinko machine 10 is given a special symbol high probability state (special symbol change state) from the end of the big hit until the next big hit occurs as an added value after the big hit. You. On the other hand, in "Big hit B", as a value added after the end of the big hit, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set short. Time saving state is given.

  Here, the “special symbol high probability state” refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed). In other words, the special game state (16R) It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to (jackpot). On the other hand, a case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is called a special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the special symbol probability state, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of the special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (ordinary symbol time reduction period) means that the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the fluctuation time is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is reduced. This is a game state in which a ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64, which is long and the number of times of opening is large. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time. .

  Thereafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the period from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot occurs, is referred to as the special symbol change period. Call it. In addition, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol from the end of the special symbol jackpot, that is, the period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the predetermined number of lottery (100 times) of the special symbol, It is usually called the time reduction period of the design (it is also simply called the time reduction period). In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the number of lotteries of the special symbol is used to indicate the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 100, it is described that the time reduction period of the normal symbol is 100 times.

  The number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” is completed, the “normal symbol time reduction state” is set. ".

  Further, the duration of the time reduction state may be arbitrarily determined. For example, when the jackpot type becomes “Big Jackpot A”, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol continues after the “Big Jackpot A” ends and the lottery of the special symbol ends 30 times. After the end, the normal symbol time saving state may be continued until the special symbol lottery ends 60 times. Further, instead of the number of lotteries of the special symbol, the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an initial setting is performed by turning on a power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to the “high probability state of special symbol”.

  When the special symbol hits and shifts from the "normal state of the ordinary symbol" to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol", the state is that the lottery of the special symbol is repeated (100 times) after the end of the special symbol jackpot. Times) until the end. On the other hand, after the special symbol hits, if the new special symbol hit does not occur by the time the special symbol lottery for the number of working hours ends, the process returns to the “normal state of the normal symbol”. As described above, the number of time savings is determined according to the special jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is “big hit B”, the predetermined number is 100 times.

  Then, when the special symbol jackpot is newly obtained while the "normal symbol time reduction state" is continued, the "normal symbol time reduction state" is further changed after the end of the new special symbol jackpot. It continues until the lottery of the special symbol for the number of times corresponding to the jackpot type ends. For example, after the "big hit B" and the transition to the "normal pattern time reduction state", when the "10" special symbol lottery becomes "big hit B", the "normal pattern time reduction state" is further changed to the "big hit B" After the end, the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times. That is, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol jackpot is newly obtained while the “normal symbol time reduction state” is continued, each time the special symbol jackpot type is changed according to the new special symbol jackpot type (“ The duration of the "normal symbol time-saving state" is updated.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball entering the first entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates a jackpot type (spot jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning prize), the display of the special symbol (first symbol) is changed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 with the trigger as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, a fluctuation display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , A big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "big hit A", a variable display is performed in which main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. In the case of "big hit B", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" other than "7" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower two parts, the lower two-thirds being a main display area Dm for variably displaying the third symbol, and the other upper one-third being a notice effect, The sub-display area Ds displays a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol arrays Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, a big hit video is displayed as a big hit if a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (retained balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying a notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or another character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each retained ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is reduced. Indicates four balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holding balls, and displaying the number of holding balls according to the number of the holding lamps in the lighting state.

  In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), a lottery of a special symbol is performed using the trigger as a trigger, and thereafter, the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Symbol) is executed. The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol according to the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37. Display is performed.

  When the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, first, the high-speed variation display of the third symbol is started, and thereafter, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 60 seconds). , The display is switched to the medium speed fluctuation display of the third symbol, and further to the low speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. Here, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a stop display in which the main symbols (third symbols) of the same number are aligned is performed, the variable effect ends, and subsequently, a big hit effect is started. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, if the main symbol (the third symbol) of the same number is not displayed, a stop display is performed, and the variable effect is completed. The next special symbol is drawn, and the next variable effect is started.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which an opening effect is performed, a period in which a round effect is performed, and a period in which an ending effect is performed. The opening effect is to increase the expectation of the player by notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. In addition, the ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state and informs the player of the game value (usually the time-saving period of the symbol) which is given to the player after the end of the big hit (displays the time-short period). Or, it is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the held special symbol lottery (performing a fixed effect display). In the ending production, the fact that the player is notified of the game value (normally, the time reduction period of the symbol) is referred to as "time reduction display", and the lottery result in the lottery of the reserved special symbol is a big hit. The fact that this is notified to the player is referred to as “determined effect display”.

  When a jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5A, first, the main controller 110 controls the sound lamp control in synchronization with the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed. An opening command is transmitted to the device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the opening effect is started following the variable effect.

  Next, the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the first round to the audio ramp controller 113 at the timing when the opening effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the first round is started following the opening effect. In the present embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, the state is continued until the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

  After the first round is started and the specific winning opening 65a is opened, when a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), the specific winning opening 65a is closed. At the same time, the first round ends. Then, the start timing of the second round is immediately reached, and the main controller 110 transmits a round number command indicating the second round to the audio ramp controller 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect corresponding to the second round is started following the round effect corresponding to the first round. When the second round is started, the opening and closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed as in the case of the first round. Thereafter, each time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new round number is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. Done. Thereby, each round effect from the first round to the 16th round is executed in order.

  Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is completed 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, an ending effect is started. As described above, in the ending effect, the end of the special game state is notified to the player, and the time reduction display is performed (the game value (normally, the time reduction period of the symbol) given to the player after the end of the big hit). Or a confirmed effect display is performed (the player is notified that the lottery result in the lottery of the reserved special symbol will be a big hit). In the ending effect, whether "short time display" or "fixed effect display" is performed depends on the type of jackpot of the special symbol this time, the type of jackpot of the reserved special symbol, the value of a counter not shown, etc. Is selected based on

  When “reduced time display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, “100 chances” (period) is displayed on the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. (Example of information) is displayed. This screen is displayed when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is "big hit B". From the end of the big hit until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, the normal symbol time reduction state Is continued. When this screen is displayed, the player can easily recognize the period during which the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued (the time reduction period of the ordinary symbol).

  It should be noted that the longer the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol is, the greater the chance of the ball passing through the second entrance 67, so that the chance of the lottery of the ordinary symbol being performed and the opportunity of being hit with the ordinary symbol are also increased. More. Therefore, the chance of opening a motorized accessory as a jackpot of a normal symbol increases, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 and a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, so that the motivation of the player to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  Further, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the first entrance is opened. When the ball entrance 64 becomes easy to enter, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which the special symbol jackpot can be obtained without the condition. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  On the other hand, when “determined effect display” is performed on the third symbol display device 81, for example, “Super chance!” (An example of another information) is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. . This screen means that the lottery result will always be a big hit if any of the lotteries of the reserved special symbols is performed. When this screen is displayed, the player can recognize that a special symbol jackpot will be won in the held special symbol lottery, so that the player expects that the special symbol jackpot will surely be obtained. Can be held. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (a second symbol) according to a lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the second symbol display device 83, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label or the like is provided. It can be seen through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Next, the passage forming member 800 provided on the front side of the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. The passage forming member 800 includes a unit base that is assembled to the inner frame 12 and a unit cover that is assembled to the lower plate unit 15. By closing the lower plate unit 15 with respect to the inner frame 12, a game ball is formed. It is formed in a state where a passage width that allows one ball to pass is secured. With this configuration, even if a ball is clogged in the passage forming member 800, the inside of the passage can be easily inspected only by opening the lower plate unit 15 from the inner frame 12. When adopting a configuration in which a ball passage is formed by closing a plurality of members as described above, the passage surface through which the game ball passes through one member and the other surface constituting the passage in the other member In this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball from coming into contact with the joint of each member when the game ball passes through the ball passage and the ball flow from becoming unstable. In the present embodiment, since the inside of the passage can be easily inspected even in a complicated ball passage, the unit base and the unit cover are each molded with a resin molded product (polycarbonate).

  Note that the passage forming member 800 does not need to be entirely configured as described above, and may be a part of a spherical passage. Further, it is only necessary that the unit base and the unit cover can be assembled to form a ball passage, and the unit cover may be attached to the unit base.

  The passage forming member 800 has a lower plate discharge passage 800a for discharging game balls to the lower plate 50 when the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1) is full, and a lower reach or a temporary play region. , And a ball ball switch 800b for discharging a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as a foul ball) that has reentered the firing path 701 after colliding with a nail or the like to the upper plate 17, and a ball release switch (not shown). A shooting ball discharge passage 800c for discharging the game balls on the shooting rail 801 to the lower plate 50 at the time of the ball removing operation for operating the game ball is formed. The passage forming member 800 integrally forms the lower plate discharge passage 800a, the foul sphere passage 800b, and the firing sphere discharge passage 800c, so that each passage is formed by a separate member. It is possible to simplify the parts cost, to reduce the number of parts to reduce the assembly cost, or to make the parts compact to facilitate the layout of other parts. Further, since a plurality of passages are collectively molded with resin, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the positional relationship between the passages.

  In particular, since the merging portion where the game ball flowing down the lower plate discharge passage 800a and the game ball flowing down the firing ball discharge passage 800c merge is also resin molded in advance, the game ball flowing down the lower plate discharge passage 800a has priority. As a result, it is possible to reliably and easily realize a configuration of flowing down to the lower plate discharge port 50a from above the firing ball discharge passage 800c so as to flow down to the lower plate.

  A gap 802 of about 40 mm is formed between the firing rail 801 and a firing path 701 formed by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 on the front of the game board 13 so as to receive a foul ball dropped from the gap. Is provided with a foul ball passage 800b. The foul ball received in foul ball passage 800b is discharged to upper plate 17 from upper plate discharge port 17a.

  At the right end of the passage forming member 800, a shooting ball discharge passage 800c that is a passage of a game ball connecting the downstream side of the firing rail 801 and the lower plate discharge port 50a is formed. A shutter mechanism (not shown) that can be opened and closed is provided at the entrance of the shooting ball discharge passage 800c, and the shutter mechanism is opened by operating a ball release switch (not shown) provided on the upper plate 17. The game balls located on the shooting rail are discharged to the shooting ball discharge passage 800c and returned to the lower plate 50.

  In the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the foul ball passage 800b are configured to be guided to the upper plate 17, but may be directly guided to the ball firing unit 112a instead of the upper plate 17. By doing so, even if a foul ball occurs, it can be fired again quickly.

  Next, among the firing paths 701 provided in the game board 13, the configuration near the foul ball entering ball passage 606 provided on the lower left side of the firing path 701 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. The foul ball entering ball passage 606 is a passage through which a foul ball flows, and the width direction is defined by the outer rail 62, the guide member 605, and the entering ball passage forming member 607 erected on the game board 13. , A passage whose front and rear surfaces are defined by the glass unit 16. This is a space in which game balls branched from the launch path 701 by the second opening 604 flow down. The foul ball that has flowed down in the foul ball entrance passage 606 enters the foul winning opening 601 provided in the passage. As described above, since the glass unit 16 forms the front surface of the foul ball entering ball passage 606, the inside of the passage can be visually confirmed. In addition, by opening the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached, inspection inside the passage can be easily performed.

  The second opening 604 is formed between the outer rail 62 and the guide member 605 that constitute the outer peripheral side of the firing path 701 formed in an arc shape. The second opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side of a region (hereinafter, referred to as a lower left chord region) where the firing sphere is fired to the upper left in the firing path 701, that is, when the foul sphere flows down by its own weight. (Hereinafter referred to as a lower left chord position). The reason why the second opening 604 is provided at the lower left chord position is that a foul ball generated near the end of the firing path 701 can enter the second opening 604 by its own weight. In the case where the second opening 604 is provided near the end of the firing path 701, that is, in a region where the fired game balls move to the upper right (hereinafter, referred to as a left upper chord region), the foul ball flows down by its own weight. The position where the contact is made is on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701 (the inner rail 61) (hereinafter referred to as the upper left chord position). In the present embodiment, the firing path 701 has a left arc shape so as to fire the game ball toward the upper left side. However, even in the case of adopting an arc configuration other than the present embodiment, the foul ball is By providing the second opening 604 on the side that comes into contact with its own weight, it is possible to easily enter a foul ball.

  Next, a configuration near the second opening 604 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of a region II in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. A guide member 602 for guiding a foul ball to the second opening is provided on the guide member 605 side (the right side in FIG. 3) of the second opening 604. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member (urethane), and its mounting base 602a is fixed to the game board 13 with screws. Since the mounting base 602a is covered with the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605, the game ball does not collide. The guide member 602 extends to about half of the firing path 701 in the width direction to receive the foul ball, and prevents the foul ball from flowing down to the start end of the firing path 701. Further, the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and then comes into contact with the guide member 602, but the tip of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is guided by the guide member. Since the protection portion is formed so as to cover the mounting base portion 602a of the guide member 602, the tip of the guide member 602 contacts the shot game ball. The guide member 602 is formed of an elastic member, and elastically deforms in a direction in which a tip portion of the guide member 602 comes into the foul ball entering ball passage 606 when it comes into contact with a game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (dotted line in FIG. 3). (Refer to the figure), and a state is obtained in which a part of the second opening 604 is covered. In this state, the guide member 602 faces the second opening, and the opening width of the second opening 604 is reduced.

  Therefore, when the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a passes near the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is elastically deformed, so that the firing force does not drop significantly. In addition, since the opening width of the second opening 604 is reduced by the elastic deformation of the guide member, it is possible to smoothly fire without falling into the second opening. Then, after the shot game ball passes, the guide member 602 elastically returns to the original position.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where the guide member 602 collides with a foul ball. The guide member 602 is configured such that the tip end protrudes toward the firing path 701 side from a straight line connecting the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 and the inclined surface start end of the outer rail 62. The outer rail 62 and the second opening 604 are formed such that an extension of the inclined surface of the outer rail 62 toward the second opening 604 is directed toward the second opening 604. In such a location, the foul ball flowing down from the outer rail 62 enters the second opening 604 by following one of the following routes.

  When invading the second opening 604 without coming into contact with the guide member 602, the flow rate of the foul ball is reduced by the protruding part 605a for preventing the foul winning opening 601 from reaching the foul winning opening 601 with the momentum. The winning opening 601 is reached. On the other hand, when the guide member enters the second opening after coming into contact with the guide member 602, the guide member is elastically deformed in a direction to enter the firing path 701 by an external force received from a foul ball. After the falling speed of the foul ball is reduced by this elastic deformation, the ball reaches the foul winning opening 601.

  Note that even if the guide member 602 is elastically deformed in a direction in which the guide member 602 enters the firing path 701 due to an external force received from the foul ball, the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605 limits the change of the guide member 602. The launching path 701 is not blocked by the external force received, and the guide member is provided only to the extent that the opening width of the second opening 604 is widened (to the extent that the gap between the guide member 602 and the protection portion 605b in FIG. 3 is eliminated). Only 602 is elastically deformed. Even in such an elastically deformed state, the path width of the launch path 701 immediately after passing the guide member 605 so that the game balls fired by the ball launch unit 112a can pass the launch path 701 is such that two game balls pass. The width is possible.

  By using such a configuration, it is possible to achieve both the function of receiving the foul ball and guiding it to the foul ball entrance path 606 and the function of smoothly passing the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. Becomes Furthermore, since the elastic deformation of the guide member 602 is restricted by using the guide member 605 which is a separate member from the guide member 602, the guide member 602 is moved in one direction (the direction in which the guide member 602 enters the ball passage 606). It is possible to eliminate the necessity of using a complicated technique such as using a material that is easy to change and hard to change in the other direction (the direction that blocks the firing path).

  In addition, the guide member 602 is not limited to the above-described configuration, as long as it has a function of guiding a foul ball to the second opening without blocking a game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a. For example, for example, a spring configuration is used in which the mounting base 602a is rotatable and can return to the origin position, and a variable configuration in which the mounting base 602a supports the plate-like member, or a rotating body that can rotate only in the game ball firing direction is used. Configuration may be used.

  In addition, any configuration that does not change may be used as long as it has the above-described function. For example, by providing a guiding passage that gradually tapers along the firing direction of the shooting sphere, the foul ball flows down to the ball firing unit 112a side. It is good also as a structure which prevents that. In this embodiment, urethane is used as the elastic member. However, any material having excellent rebound resilience may be used, and other rubbers (such as silicon rubber) may be used. Further, the mounting position of the guide member 602 may be on the inner rail 61 side.

  In the foul ball entrance passage 606, a projection 605 c integrally formed with the guide member 605 is provided so as to cover the foul winning opening 601, which will be described later in detail. It prevents a violent collision.

  The foul ball that has flowed down the foul ball entrance passage 606 enters the foul winning opening 601 and flows down a collection passage (not shown) in the same manner as the game ball that has won another winning opening. It is discharged to an out port (not shown) provided on the back surface. The foul winning switch 208a detects a foul ball that has entered the foul winning opening 601. The detection result is based on the award ball payout process (not shown) and the abnormal ball entry determination process (S1004 in FIG. 23) described later. Used for

  The fired ball detection switch 208b is a proximity switch that detects a game ball that has passed through the fired path 701, and the detection result is used in a later-described incoming ball abnormality determination process (S1004 in FIG. 23). The fired ball detection switch 208b is provided near the guide member 602 at a position where the fired ball can be detected and the foul ball does not flow backward.

  By setting the shooting ball detection switch 208b as a switch that can also detect the direction in which the game ball passes, it is determined whether the detected game ball is a game ball that has been fired or a foul ball that has flowed back through the firing path 701. Therefore, the mounting position of the shooting ball detection switch 208b can be set freely. The switch capable of detecting the passing direction of the game ball includes a passage portion through which the game ball passes in a line, and a plurality of detection portions provided along the passing direction of the game ball. ) May be detected to detect the direction in which the game ball passes, and specifically, a technology that detects a change in a magnetic field and an electric signal corresponding to the change in the magnetic field may be considered.

  In the present embodiment, the foul sphere entrance ball passage 606 is configured to be at an acute angle with respect to the launch path 701. This is a configuration for performing a countermeasure against the flow of the game ball in the firing path 701 and the foul winning opening 601 and will be described later in detail.

  Here, the flow of the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a rolls on the firing rail 801 and jumps over the gap 802 with its momentum and rolls on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605. Thereafter, the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 and returns along the outer rail 62 to the game area via the first opening 603 where the ball preventing member 68 is provided. It is launched.

  Among the game balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a, the flow of the foul sphere differs depending on the location where the foul sphere is generated. When a foul ball is generated on the end side of the firing path 701, the ball is guided into the foul ball entrance path 606 by the guiding member 602, and enters the foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entrance path. Although the details will be described later, the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) based on the ball entering the foul winning opening 601 is set to one ball, and the payout control is performed based on the game ball entering the foul winning opening 601. A game ball is paid out to the upper bowl 17 from the device 111.

  On the other hand, the foul sphere generated at the start end side of the firing path 701, specifically, at the start end side of the firing path 701 from the second opening 604 serving as a branch port to the foul ball entrance path 606 falls into the gap 802. Then, it is returned to the upper plate 17 via the foul ball passage 800b.

  In the present embodiment, the foul ball is branched by the second opening 604 or the gap 802, and the ball is supplied to the upper plate 17, so that the player can play the game based on the generation of the foul ball. Since the ball is supplied to the upper plate, it can be fired again as it is. Further, since two structures (the second opening 604 and the gap 802) for branching the foul sphere are provided at different positions of the firing path 701, the foul sphere is emitted on the side closer to the location where the foul sphere is generated. , The period during which the foul sphere stays in the launch path 701 can be shortened as compared with the case where there is only one configuration for branching the foul sphere. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a vicious circle in which a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a collides with a foul ball staying in the firing path 701 and a new foul ball is generated.

  Furthermore, since the foul sphere entrance path 606 is used as a configuration for branching the foul sphere from the launch path on the game board 13, the foul sphere is returned from the game board 13 side to the front frame 14 as in the related art. It is not necessary to provide a passage for the above. Therefore, the limited space in the gaming machine on the front frame side can be effectively utilized as a space for installing other members (for example, decorative members and frame buttons). In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated foul ball passage on the game board 13 side so as to communicate with the front frame 14 side, the degree of design freedom of the game board 13 is increased, and a pachinko machine that can enhance the interest for the player. 10 can be provided.

  Here, a characteristic configuration of each member provided near the firing path 701 will be described. The angle of inclination on the firing rail 801 is designed so that the game ball reaches above the lowermost end of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 so that the shot game ball jumps over the gap 802 without fail (approximately). 20 degrees). The inclination angle of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605 is designed to be steeper (about 30 degrees) than the inclined angle on the firing rail 801. The gap 802 is located on the extension line of the inclined surface 605a in the flowing direction. Therefore, the foul ball flowing down on the guide member 605 falls into the gap 802. Further, it is designed so that the shooting sphere rolling on the inclined surface 605 a of the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604. Specifically, the extension line A (see FIG. 4) extending the inclined surface 605 a in the firing direction reaches the upper side from the lower end of the outer rail 62.

  In addition, it is designed so that the second opening 604 faces the extension of the lower end of the outer rail 62. Therefore, it is configured that the foul ball flowing down along the outer rail 62 surely falls into the second opening 604. In other words, the foul ball entering path 606 is formed at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launch direction (rolling direction) of the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605, and the falling direction of the foul ball flowing down along the outer rail 62. On the other hand, the foul ball entering ball passage 606 is bent with respect to the firing path 701 such that the foul ball entering ball passage 606 (the second opening 604) is located on an extension of the foul ball entering ball passage 606.

  With such a configuration, the area through which the shooting ball passes and the gap 802 and the second opening 604 can be provided at different positions, so that the shooting ball does not fall and the foul ball falls. can do. The same effect can be obtained even if a step is provided in each passage.

  In the present embodiment, the passage width of the firing path 701 is designed to be narrow at a position where the protection portion 605b of the guide member 605 and the inner rail 61 face each other. This is to ensure that the foul sphere generated at the end of the firing path does not flow down to the starting end of the firing path, but flows down to the foul ball entrance path 606 without fail.

  In the present embodiment, the foul ball entry path 606 is provided on the lower left side of the game board 13. This is because the player does not feel uncomfortable when responding by paying out prize balls, instead of directly returning the foul balls as in the related art. That is, since the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 17 by entering the foul ball, the upper plate 17 (specifically, the upper plate 17) At the lower left side of the game board 13 which is above and near the point where the game ball is discharged.

  As described above, the use of the foul ball entrance path 606 for processing the foul ball in the firing path 701 eliminates the need to form a dedicated path for returning the foul ball to the player, but has a malicious intention. There is a risk that a player may enter a game ball with a thread into the foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entrance path 606 and manipulate the thread to illegally acquire the game ball. Therefore, a configuration for preventing the above-described fraud will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating a state in which a game ball to which a thread 610 as a thread is attached has reached the foul winning switch 208a in the foul ball entering path 606, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state after the thread 610 is moved in the direction of arrow 611 by the player pulling the thread 610.

  FIG. 5A shows a state in which a game ball to which the thread 610 is attached is fired by the ball firing unit 112a, and the game ball reaches the foul winning switch 208a in the foul winning opening 601. The game ball to which the thread 610 is attached is thrown in from the upper plate 17 like a normal game ball, and is fired by the ball firing unit 112a.

  The thread 610 used for such an illegal game is made of a material that is thin enough not to be caught by a structure in the ball firing unit 112a and that can withstand the weight of the game ball. Specifically, it is a piano wire, a fishing line (made of nylon), a cotton line or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the foul ball entering ball passage 606 is formed to be bent at an acute angle with respect to the game ball launch direction (rolling direction) of the game ball rolling on the inclined surface 605a of the guide member 605. When the game ball reaches the foul winning opening 601 (the foul winning switch 208a), the thread 610 attached to the game ball has a substantially V-shaped (or substantially U-shaped) shape (FIG. )reference).

  In FIG. 5A, the guide member 602 is in contact with the inside of a substantially V-shaped thread 610, receives a load of a game ball from the thread 610, and the distal end thereof is on the side of the foul ball entering ball passage 606. It is bent.

  Further, the thread 610 is also in contact with the projection 605c of the guide member 605. This will be described with reference to FIG. The protruding portion 605a is configured to cover the foul winning opening 601 and its tip (line B in FIG. 4) projects to the left from the end of the foul winning opening 601 (line C in FIG. 4). (Line B is to the left of line C). Therefore, a part of the substantially V-shaped thread 610 comes into contact with the protrusion 605a. In addition, the line B in FIG. 4 is a vertical line abutting on the tip end position of the protruding portion 605c, and the line C in FIG. 4 is a vertical line abutting on one end of the foul winning opening 601 (one end on the side where the protruding portion 605c protrudes). Line.

  FIG. 5B shows a state in which the player has operated the thread 610 from the state of FIG. 5A and the thread 610 has moved in the direction of the arrow 611 (the direction opposite to the firing direction of the game ball). In this state, the game ball to which the thread 610 is attached is located above the foul winning switch 208a. In this way, by alternately repeating the state of FIG. 5A and the state of FIG. 5B, an act of detecting a winning switch multiple times using one game ball and illegally acquiring a game ball is performed. Will be.

  Next, differences from FIG. 5A will be described with reference to FIG. The bending state of the guide member 602 is significantly different from the above, except that the position of the game ball to which the thread 610 is attached changes as described above. This is because the guide member 602 bends in the frictional energy generated by the movement of the yarn 610 and bends in the movement direction of the yarn 610. That is, because the thread 610 moves in the direction opposite to the firing direction of the game ball, the guide member 602 receives an external force stronger than the external force when the ball collides with the foul ball. Note that the external force referred to here is conceptually used such as the entire force received by the guide member 602 and the force received by a part of the guide member 602, and the tip surface of the guide member 602 is moved by the movement of the thread 610. Among them, one point in contact with the thread 610 is subjected to an external force, so that the leading end of the guide member 602 is greatly elastically deformed.

  By causing the guide member 602 to elastically deform along with the movement of the thread 610 in this manner, the movement of the thread 610 and the movement of the game ball are not interlocked, and it becomes possible to make unauthorized games difficult. In addition, when elastically deforming, the elastic ball is deformed elastically so that the overall length of the thread 610 becomes shorter, so that even if the thread 610 is pulled, the position of the game ball can be prevented from moving. As such a configuration, a member that is reduced by friction energy generated by movement of the yarn 610 can be considered.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the leading end of the guide member 602 is bent so as to close the firing path 701 with the movement of the thread 610, so that a normal game is performed while performing an illegal act using the thread 610. Even if the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a comes into contact with the guide member 602 (or the thread 610), it is possible to restrict the shot game ball from normally reaching the game area.

  In the present embodiment, the guide member 602 has a function of restricting the movement of the thread 610 and a function of restricting the firing of game balls when performing a normal game while operating the thread 610. Apart from 602, a new member may be used as an anti-fraud member.

  Note that a cutting unit that can cut the thread 610 may be provided on the protrusion 605c. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the yarn 610 from being cut at the position where the yarn 610 comes into contact with the protrusion 605c, and to prevent the above-mentioned fraud. As the cutting means, a means that cuts using a frictional force and a pressure when the yarn 610 moves is considered. Further, a cutting unit may be provided at a portion where the guide member is provided. By doing so, it is possible to provide cutting means at two places where the thread 610 abuts, and it is possible to further prevent illegal games.

  Note that a detection switch may be provided on the protrusion 605c so that the contact state for a predetermined time or more can be detected. In this way, it is also possible to monitor that the threaded game ball has entered the foul ball entering ball passage 606. The location where such a detection switch is installed is not limited to this, and any location where the game ball does not abut for a long time and the thread 610 abuts may be used. Further, a detection switch may be provided to detect that the guiding member 602 is elastically deformed by the thread 610 and comes into contact with the wall (the inner rail 61) on the opposite side of the firing path 701, or the firing path 701 (with the guide member 605). A sensor for detecting the presence of the thread 610 at the location where the inner rail 61 faces) may be provided. This sensor is provided with a plurality of detection units along the firing path 701, and may be any sensor that can determine that the plurality of sensors are detecting an object continuously for a predetermined period or more. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to passing of the game ball or dust attached to the detection unit.

  As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. The balls paid out by the payout device 133 are paid out to the upper plate 17 via the upper plate discharge port 17a by a ball flow path (not shown). A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131. It should be noted that, in addition to the upper plate 17, a ball supply passage (not shown) for supplying game balls to the ball launching unit 112a, The flow may be made to flow down to the firing unit 112a, or a plurality of these paths may be provided, and the flow destination may be switched by the flow path switching mechanism. In this case, it is preferable to operate the flow path switching mechanism so that only the payout of the prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the foul ball winning opening 601 flows down to the ball supply passage or the ball firing unit 112a. By doing so, it is possible to quickly play a game using the game ball provided by the generation of the foul ball.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Although the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment has been described above, the present pachinko machine 10 uses the guiding member 602 to transfer the foul sphere generated in the firing path 701 to the foul sphere entrance path 606. The foul ball is guided to enter the foul winning opening 601 provided in the foul ball entrance path 606. Then, one game ball is paid out from the payout control device 111 based on the ball entering the foul ball winning opening 601 and given to the upper plate 17. By using such a configuration, there is no need to provide a dedicated passage for returning game balls to the upper plate 17 in response to a foul ball, and the cost of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, by using the prize ball payout mechanism based on the entry of the ball into the winning opening, which is conventionally provided in the pachinko machine 10 like the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to achieve more effects.

  In the present embodiment, when one ball is detected, a prize ball is paid out when one ball is detected. However, it is sufficient that a game value equivalent to the detected ball is provided to the player. For example, a gaming machine that digitally manages a held ball may send a signal of the same value to the digital as one gaming ball. In addition, the game value of the number of used game balls and one change of the special symbol 1 is associated in advance, and the number of detected foul balls is counted. The special symbol 1 may be varied as a game value equivalent to the number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the guide member 602 for guiding the foul ball to the foul ball entry passage is provided so as to elastically deform in a direction in which the opening width of the second opening 604 increases by abutting on the foul ball. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently guide the foul ball to the foul ball entrance path. Further, in a state in which the foul ball is not in contact with the guiding member 602, the opening width of the second opening 604 is narrower than in a state in which the foul ball is in contact with the guiding ball 602, so that the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is This makes it difficult to enter the second opening 604.

<Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. The payout control device 111 and the main control device 110 are configured to be able to transmit and receive data bidirectionally by a data transmission / reception circuit. Is transmitted to the sub-controller only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1; A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to a special value. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the symbol big hit random number table, it decides that it is the big hit of the special design. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot from the low probability (the special symbol) ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol. The first random number table for high probability of special symbols and the first random number table for low probability of special symbols are respectively provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 (not shown). FIG. 6 (a)).

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first one The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. Then, as shown in FIG. 9A, in the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, the random number value which is a big hit of the special symbol is one, and the random number value "0" Is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 out of the total number of random numbers, and therefore the probability of the special symbol being a jackpot is “1/400”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are ten random numbers that are the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “0 to 9” are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 10, so the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/40”.

  In addition, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability are duplicated values. It is also possible to set a random value for each of the jackpots so as not to cause the hit. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state), by changing the random number value of the jackpot, the special symbol jackpot is obtained. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value to be predicted, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 49” is “big hit A”. When the random number is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol big hit type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set in a first hit type selection table 202b. 110 is provided in the ROM 202.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99) and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in the range of 90-97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number value for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set in a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each type of stop according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, the jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely off”. In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 98, 99 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and back” or “reach other than front and rear out”. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select “completely out of place”.

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long rendering time can be performed more frequently, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 21) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 10) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. I have.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, “variable normal reach”, “variable super reach”, “variable special reach” as variation patterns for the deviation. "Various types are defined, and as the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B," common normal reach "various," super common reach "various, and" common special reach "various are defined. Various types of "shared normal reach", various types of "shared super reach", and various types of "shared special reach" are specified. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to a lottery result and a stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202c. Is determined to be a normal symbol hit if the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit. The second random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of 240 in the total number of random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 21).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is provided with a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. And a work area (work area) in which values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like are stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 21), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 20). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When NMI is input to the terminal, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  Here, the details of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. . Details of these various tables will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

  FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag 203e. , A time reduction counter 203f, a special figure change start flag 203g, an incoming flag 203h, a firing flag 203i, an incoming ball counter 203j, a fired ball counter 203k, a timer counter 203m, and a timer counting flag 203n. And another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4th reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  In addition, as soon as the ball wins in the first entrance opening 64 (start winning) and the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired in accordance with the starting winning, aside from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, From the obtained values of the respective counters C1 to C3, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed may be predicted (estimated). As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning. The prediction is described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that the various types of information correspond to pass / fail, stop type, change pattern, and the like.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S504 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S305 in FIG. 14).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a holding ball number command (see S306 in FIG. 14 and S505 in FIG. 16). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 on the basis of the number of retained balls notified by the display reserved ball number command, and displays a second symbol reservation lamp indicating the number of retained balls. 84 is turned on.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 17).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703: No in FIG. 18).

  The probable change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the value of the probable change flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special design. If the value of the probability change flag 203e is OFF, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203e has an initial value set to off, and is set to on at the end of the big hit A (probable change big hit) in the big hit control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). Thereafter, when the start of the next big hit is set, it is set to off (S313 in FIG. 14).

  When the special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 15) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol change start process, the value of the probable change flag 203e is referred to, and if the value is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probable change flag 203e Is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 15).

  The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203f is set to zero, and 100 is set at the end of the jackpot B (hours jackpot) in the jackpot control process (see S1005 in FIG. 21). That is, when the jackpot B is reached, 100 is newly set regardless of the value of the counter 203f during the time reduction.

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is referred to. If the value is 1 or more, the value of the normal symbol is determined based on the second random number table 202c for a high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 while the lottery is performed, a lottery of a normal symbol is performed based on the second random number table 202c for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 17).

  The special figure change start flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to start the change of the special symbol. If the special figure change start flag 203g is on, it is the timing to start the change of the special symbol. If the special figure change start flag 203g is off, this indicates that it is not time to start changing the special symbol. The special pattern change start flag 203g is set to ON while a change pattern command is set in the special symbol change start process (see S412 in FIG. 15). Then, it is referred to in the external output process (S1001 in FIG. 21), and when it is determined in the process that the special figure variation start flag 203g is ON, that is, when it is determined that the special symbol variation start timing is reached. (S1101: Yes in FIG. 22), the variable pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S1103 in FIG. 22), and the command is set to off (see S1102 in FIG. 22).

  The entry flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. If the entry flag 203h is on, a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 and a foul winning is achieved. The switch 208a indicates that a game ball has been detected, and if the ball entry flag 203h is off, this indicates that no game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. This ball entry flag 203h is set to ON when it is determined that the foul winning switch 208a is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (S202 in FIG. 13). . Then, it is referred to in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of main controller 110 (see S1206 in FIG. 23), and when it is determined that ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206 in FIG. 23: Yes) ), The number-of-entry counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207 in FIG. 23), and is turned off (S1208 in FIG. 23).

  That is, the ball entry flag 203h is set to on based on the game ball entering the foul winning opening 601. In the main processing of the main control device 110, the ball entry flag 203h is set based on whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is on. Thus, it is possible to execute a process when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601.

  The firing flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball has been fired. If the firing flag 203i is on, it indicates that the game ball has been fired, and that the game ball has been detected by the fire ball detection switch 208b. If the firing flag 203i is off, it indicates that the game ball has not been fired. The firing flag 203i is set to ON when it is determined that the firing ball detection switch 208b is ON in the switch reading process executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (see S206 in FIG. 13). . Then, when the firing flag 203i is determined to be on (S1209 in FIG. 23: Yes), it is referred to in the incoming ball abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (S1209 in FIG. 23). The firing ball number counter 203k is incremented by 1 and set off (S1211 in FIG. 23).

  That is, the launch flag 203i is set to ON based on the launch of the game ball, and in the main processing of the main control device 110, the launch ball 203i is launched based on whether or not the launch flag 203i is ON. It is possible to execute the processing in the case where it has occurred.

  The number-of-entry counter 203j is a predetermined time (in the present embodiment) after a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 during a period of judging an abnormality in entering the foul winning opening 601 (abnormality judging period). This counter is used to count the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 at 20 seconds). This entry counter 203j is incremented by 1 when the entry flag 203h is on in the entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 23). See S1207). Then, after the elapse of the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) (S1216 in FIG. 23: Yes), or after the abnormality is determined and the error processing is performed (after the execution of S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23), It is reset to 0 (see S1217 in FIG. 23).

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the incoming ball number counter 203j is larger than a predetermined value Y (10 in the present embodiment) in the incoming ball abnormality determination period (20 seconds) (FIG. 23, S1214: Yes), an error process is executed (see S1215 in FIG. 23). Here, the predetermined value Y (10) is set to a value that does not enter the foul winning opening 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds) if the player intends to execute the game normally when playing the game. I have. Therefore, when the value of the number-of-entry counter becomes larger than the predetermined value Y (10) for a predetermined time (20 seconds) after the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, the player normally plays the game. It is considered that the action has not been executed, that is, an illegal act such as illegally entering the foul winning opening 601 has been executed. Therefore, in this case, the error processing is executed as described above, so that the fact that an illegal act is being executed can be notified.

  The number-of-launched balls counter 203k is a predetermined time (in the present embodiment) after a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 during a period of judging an abnormality in the entering of the foul winning opening 601 (incident abnormality determination period). At 20 seconds), among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a, the game ball that has passed through the fire ball detection switch 208b, that is, the game ball fired by the ball fire unit 112a, and the gap 802 due to a poor firing or the like. This is a counter used to count game balls other than the game balls that have fallen to (hereinafter, referred to as normally fired game balls). This firing number counter 203k is incremented by 1 when the above-described firing flag 203i is on in the incoming ball abnormality determination processing executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (S1210 in FIG. 23). ). After the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) elapses (S1216 in FIG. 23: Yes), or after an error is determined and error processing is performed (after S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), 0 is set. (See S1217 in FIG. 23).

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), the entry number counter is set to a value greater than the value obtained by adding the predetermined value X (2 in the present embodiment) to the value of the shot number counter 203k. When the value of 203j is large, that is, as a result of comparing the number of game balls normally fired and the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601, the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 is 2 When it is determined that there are more balls (three balls or more) (S1212 in FIG. 23: Yes), error processing is executed (S1213 in FIG. 23).

  In this ball entry abnormality determination processing, a situation where the number of winning balls to a specific winning opening is larger than the number of shooting balls, which cannot be generated in a normal game, is detected, and a specific winning opening (Fall winning opening 601) is detected. It is possible to monitor that an illegal act such as illegally entering a game ball is performed.

  Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described incoming ball abnormality determination processing will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, an abnormal entry determination is started, and the number of launched balls counter 203 k and the number of entered balls counter 203 j are counted. For this reason, the game balls that trigger the start of the abnormal ball entry determination are not counted by the launched ball counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, a game ball fired by the ball launching unit 112a has already been left in the launch path 701, and it is considered that the game ball may enter the foul winning opening 601. Can be In consideration of such an assumed error, a predetermined value X is provided so that error processing is executed when a clear abnormal state is detected. Accordingly, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-launches counter 203j is larger than the value of the number-of-launched-balls counter 203k, no error processing is performed, even though no cheating has been performed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the above-described one, and may be a value smaller than 2 (for example, 1) or a value larger than 2 (for example, 5). Further, the predetermined value X need not be set.

  Here, the number-of-incidence counter 203j and the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k are added in the entry-abnormality determination processing because the entry flag 203h is turned on based on the fact that a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. This is the case where the timer counting flag 203n is turned on. Thus, the counting process by the number-of-balls counter 203j and the number-of-shots counter 203k necessary for the abnormality determination can be executed only during the abnormal-ball-entry determination period (20 seconds), so that a game other than the abnormal-ball-entry determination period is performed. The processing load on the machine can be reduced. The counting process by the firing number counter 203k may be performed at all times, and the number of balls counted during the period during which the abnormal ball entry is determined may be taken out.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number-of-entry-balls counter 203j and the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k are configured to be added in the processing executed in the main processing of the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The addition may be made in other processes such as a process executed in the interrupt process of the device 110.

  The timer counter 203m is a predetermined time (in the present embodiment, after the game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 during the entry failure determination period in the entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main control device 110. 20 seconds). The predetermined time is not limited to 20 seconds, but may be 10 seconds shorter than this or 30 seconds longer than this, and can be changed by changing the value set in the timer counter 203m. I have.

  The timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (in 20 seconds) when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entry flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. (Equivalent) is set (S1204 in FIG. 23). Then, when the timer counting flag 203m is on, the count value is decremented by 1 each time the in-ball abnormality determination processing is executed (S1202 in FIG. 23), and when the timer counter 203m becomes 0 (FIG. 23). S1216: Yes), the processing after the elapse of the predetermined time is executed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23). Here, since the incoming ball abnormality determination process is a process executed every 4 ms in the main process of main controller 110, timer counter 203m is decremented by 1 every 4 ms. That is, when 5000 is set in the timer counter 203m, the value becomes 0 after 20 seconds, and the process is performed after a predetermined time (20 seconds) has elapsed (see S1217 to S1218 in FIG. 23).

  In addition, the timer counter 203m determines that there is an abnormality during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), and executes error processing (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is executed), a predetermined time ( Since the abnormal ball entry determination is completed without waiting for the elapse of 20 seconds), it is reset to 0 after the execution of the error processing.

  The timer counting flag 203n indicates a period during which the abnormal ball entry is determined in the abnormal entry ball determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110 (the predetermined time after the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 described above). ). The timer counting flag 203n is set to the above-described timer when the timer counting flag 203n is off and the ball entry flag 203h is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process executed in the main process of the main controller 110. The counter 203m is set and turned on (see S1205 in FIG. 23). Then, it is referred to every time the ball entry abnormality determination processing is executed (S1201 in FIG. 23), and is set to OFF when the timer entry 203m becomes 0 after the entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) has elapsed. (S1218 in FIG. 23). Further, when it is determined that there is an abnormality during the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds) and error processing is performed (when S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23 is performed), a predetermined time (20 seconds) elapses. 23, the ball entry abnormality determination is terminated without waiting, so that it is turned off after the execution of the error processing, similarly to the timer counter 203m described above (S1218 in FIG. 23).

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Next, details of the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. .

  As described above, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) is a table in which the value of a random number that is a big hit of a special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a includes a table (a first random number table 202a for a low probability) and a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit when the special symbol has a low probability. There is provided a table (first random number table 202a for high probability) for determining whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot at the time of probability, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each table is different. I have. As described above, by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot, the probability of the jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9B) is set so that the big hit A and the big hit B can be selected. Specifically, the value “0-49” of the first hit type counter C2 is set as the determination value of the big hit A, and “50-99” is set as the determination value of the big hit B.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 9C) is a data table in which hit values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 9C, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol (during the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is "5 to 28". In the case of the range, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, when the ordinary symbol has a high probability (during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), when the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number buffer counter is in the range of “5 to 204”, the normal symbol is not displayed. It is determined to be a hit. In addition, as described above, when it is determined that a normal symbol hits, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and The electric accessory is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 10A) is a data table used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the special symbol lottery results are defined in the variation pattern table 202d. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10 (b)), an off (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10 (c)), At least a deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) is defined. Although illustration is omitted, a variation pattern table in a time-saving gaming state, a variation pattern table corresponding to a value stored in the special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203a, and the like are also set.

  Next, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the selected variation pattern is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the jackpot fluctuation pattern, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value for each variation pattern.

  Specifically, the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds) are “0 to 50”, and the fluctuation patterns of various super reach (60 seconds) are “51 to 179” and various special reach (90 seconds). With respect to the fluctuation pattern of (1), “180 to 198” are set as the judgment values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when selecting a fluctuation pattern in which the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, determines the fluctuation pattern in which the judgment value corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the big hit. Is selected from the change pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type of the fluctuation pattern to be selected (the fluctuation time) is set when the special symbol lottery result is out of order. If the special symbol lottery result is out of order, as described above, it is determined whether the stop type is completely off (non-reach) or out of reach (reach common) from a stop type selection table (not shown) as described above. It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", out of reach is set.

  Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is completely out of range, a short out (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time and a long out (10 seconds) with a long fluctuation time are set. "0-98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for a short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" for a long deviation (10 seconds).

  Also, for the out-of-reach, “0-149” is set for the out-of-range normal reach (30 seconds), and “150-197” is set for the out-of-range super reach (60 seconds). “198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines the stop type when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order in the normal game state, and obtains the fluctuation obtained from the out-of-office (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. Based on the value of the type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

  FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probable change) variation pattern table 202d3. The deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is a data table for selecting a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol to be deviated when the game state is the probable change game state. The deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is different in that the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 that is set is different from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 described above.

  As described above, when the game state is the probable change game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete departure is determined. , "90-99", the out-of-reach is determined.

  As described above, when the game state is the certain-variable game state than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when the game is out of the normal game state is set to be lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from being prolonged at the time of the probability change and the period until the jackpot is prolonged from being prolonged. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is prolonged in the probable change game state in which the big hit is likely to occur and the player feels bored.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and an external output terminal board 261 are connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. It transmits various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes an input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, a foul winning switch 208a, a shooting ball detection switch 208b, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group 208c (not shown), and a power supply device. A MPU 201 is connected to a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described below provided on the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51 a provided on the operation handle 51 via the input / output port 215 and the firing control device 112, a stop switch 51, and an operation amount detection switch. Various processes are executed based on the signal output from the switch 51c, the signal output from the various switches 208, and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, the external output terminal board 261 and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  As described above, the external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111, and receives a signal from each input / output port. The signals to be received include, for example, an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality of the main control device 110, an error signal indicating a state determined to be an error by the processing performed by the main control device 110, and a prize detected by the main control device 110 And a prize ball payout signal indicating that a prize ball has been paid out in the payout control device 111.

  In the present embodiment, a prize detection signal and a prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the foul prize switch 208b provided in the prize ball prize port 601 which is a prize port for a foul ball to enter, are transmitted to various other prize ports provided in the other prize ports. It is configured to be output separately from the winning detection signal and the prize ball payout signal based on the detection result of the switch. When analyzing the game result of the pachinko machine 10 on the hall computer side, generally, the ratio of the total number of used game balls (total out) to the total number of paid out game balls (total safe) is calculated. This is because, although the calculation (base calculation) is performed, if the number of prize balls paid out based on the foul balls not used in the game is added, it is impossible to calculate an accurate base value. Therefore, the output form is different so that the hall computer can remove the number of prize balls paid out based on the foul ball.

  These signals are transmitted from each of the control devices (110, 111) to a corresponding one of a plurality of ports provided for receiving a signal provided on the external output terminal board 261. The signal received at each port is referred to by the hall computer 262. In the present embodiment, a plurality of ports corresponding to various signals are provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and identifiers may be added to various signals and transmission and reception may be performed through one port. The received signal can be identified by the identifier as to which information the signal indicates. Thus, the number of ports provided on the external output terminal board 261 can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

  The launch control device 112 launches a sphere so as to have a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 detected by the operation amount detection switch 51c when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. This is for controlling the unit 112a. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 controls the output of sound in the sound output device 226, the output of turning on and off the light in the lamp display device (the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the display control such as the fluctuation effect (variation display). The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the device 114 is controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super-reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect content, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  Here, the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222. The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 has at least a fluctuation pattern table 222a.

  In the variation pattern table 222a, variation patterns corresponding to the types of variation patterns (off, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113. In the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a power-off processing flag 223x, and a power-off flag 223y and at least a memory area 223z.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. In the present pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 wins a start, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning is obtained. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates) various kinds of information (acceptance, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of a winning information command.

  When the prize information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (acceptance, stop type, change pattern) notified by the prize information command as prize information, and the prize information is used as the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first to fourth areas). Is done. That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area with the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. A counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of standbys) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and for lighting an LED (not shown) indicating the reserved ball number. That is, in response to the reception of the number-of-retained-balls command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the number of retained balls indicated by the command in the special-designated-reserved-ball number counter 223b, controls the lighting of the LED, and performs the control after the storage. In order to notify the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1502 in FIG. 26), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1602 in FIG. 27). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1505 in FIG. 26), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 27).

  The power-off processing flag 223x indicates that a power-off command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 when the main control device 110 detects the power-off, and the power-off flag 223y is set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command. The power is turned off, and power-off processing is performed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). When the power-off processing ends, the power-off processing in-progress flag 223x is set to off (see S1417 in FIG. 25). The power-off processing in-progress flag 223x is referred to in the start-up processing (see S1302 in FIG. 24). If it is on, the power is turned off during the power-off processing (that is, the RAM is destroyed). Thus, the processing in the case where the RAM is destroyed is executed without checking the RAM destruction.

  The power-off flag 223y is set so that when the main controller 110 detects the power-off, a power-off command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the audio-lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off flag 223y is turned on. This is set, and the power-off process is executed (see S1416 in FIG. 25). Then, in the startup process (FIG. 24) of the sound lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on, the work area of the RAM is cleared and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1310 in FIG. 24). reference).

  The other memory area 223z further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main controller 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 26) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Since the display control device 114 is a known device, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 5) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches (the foul winning switch 208a, the launch ball detection switch 208b, etc.) connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the processing corresponding to the state of the switch is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (399 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 399, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball is passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67. The accompanying through gate passing process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S101). This switch reading process (S101) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), reads the status of various switches connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and sets the status of various switches. This is a process for executing a corresponding process.

  In this switch reading process, first, it is determined whether or not the foul winning switch 208a is on (S201). The foul winning switch 208a is turned on when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 and the game ball passes through the foul winning switch 208a. In the processing of S201, when it is determined that the foul winning switch 208a is on (S201: Yes), the ball entry flag 203h is set on (S202), a foul winning command is set (S203), and the processing of S204 is performed. Move on to processing.

  By setting the ball entry flag 203h to ON in the process of S202, in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) executed in the main process of the main controller 110, a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601. Can be detected. The foul winning command set in the processing of S203 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201. Is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Upon receiving the foul winning command, the payout control device 111 controls the payout motor 216 so as to pay out the number of game balls corresponding to the command (one ball in the present embodiment).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S201 that the foul winning switch 208a is off (S201: No), the processing of S202 and S203 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S204.

  When the processing of S201 or S203 is completed, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204). The timer counting flag 203n is turned on when it is determined that the ball entry flag is on in the ball entry abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) described later (S1204 in FIG. 23). The on state is continued until the period for judging an abnormality in ball entry (ball entry abnormality judgment period) elapses. In the present embodiment, the entry abnormality determination period is set to 20 seconds. If it is determined in S204 that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S204: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the shooting ball detection switch 208b is ON (S205). The fired ball detection switch 208b is turned on when a game ball is fired and the game ball passes through the fired ball detection switch 208b. In the processing of S205, when it is determined that the shooting ball detection switch 208b is on (S205: Yes), the shooting flag 203i is set on (S206), and the process proceeds to S207.

  That is, when a game ball is detected by the launch ball detection switch 208b while the timer counting flag 203n is on (S205: Yes), the launch flag 203i is set to on (S206). ). Thus, the state of the fired ball detection switch can be read only during the period of the incoming ball abnormality determination that requires counting the number of fired balls, so that the processing load can be reduced. In addition, in the case of counting the number of fired balls in other processing or detecting a fired ball, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is configured to read the state of the fired ball detection switch even during periods other than the incoming ball abnormality determination period. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is not on (S204: No), and when it is determined that the launching ball detection switch 208b is not on (S205: No), the process proceeds to S206. The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S207.

  In the process of S207, a process of reading other switches is executed (S207). As other switches, for example, detection of a ball entering the above various entrances (first entrance 64, second entrance 67) and various entrances (general entrance 63, specific entrance 65a) is detected. And a touch sensor 51a, a stop switch 51b, and an operation amount detection switch 51c which are input via the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112. When the ball sensor detects the entry of a game ball of various entrances or various prize ports, detection information (prize detection information) is stored based on the entered ball port or prize port. The winning detection information stored here is referred to in an external output process (see FIG. 22) executed in the main process of the main control device 110, and a prize ball command based on the winning detection information is transmitted to the payout control device 111. As a result, a prize ball is paid out based on the entry of the ball into the entrance or the winning opening. In addition, based on the detection results of the touch sensor 51a, the stop switch 51b, and the operation amount detection switch 51c, a firing permission signal and a firing instruction signal are transmitted to the firing control device.

  The various switches 208 described above (the foul winning switch 208a, the fire ball detection switch 208b, and the other switch 208c) are turned off after being read in the switch reading process. Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem caused by continuously reading the state of the switch.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured that whether or not a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 is detected by the above-described switch reading process executed every 2 ms. That is, by detecting the state of the foul winning switch 208a every 2 ms, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, a time of 2 ms or more is required for one game ball to pass through the foul winning switch 208a. Therefore, while the state of the foul winning switch 208a is detected by the switch reading process (for 2 ms), two or more game balls pass through the foul winning switch 208a, and the number of passed game balls cannot be calculated (missing). ) Can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the state of the foul winning switch 208a is detected in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be detected in the process of (1). The interval at which the state of the foul winning switch 208a is detected may be changed as appropriate according to the time during which one game ball passes through the foul winning switch 208a.

  Further, the foul winning switch 208a of the present embodiment is configured to be able to output a signal for each ball even when game balls continuously pass. Specifically, the foul winning switch 208a has a through hole (diameter 12mm) which is slightly larger than the game ball (diameter 11mm), so that two game balls cannot pass at the same time. Therefore, when the game balls pass in a row, the game balls pass in a horizontal direction with respect to the passing direction. Here, the foul winning switch 208a is provided with a detection unit that detects a magnetic field that changes as a game ball passes and outputs an electric signal according to the magnitude of the magnetic field. The changing magnetic field changes according to the volume of the game ball in the detection range of the detection unit, and the detection range of the detection unit is smaller than the diameter (11 mm) of the game ball with respect to the passing direction of the game ball. It is configured to be a range. As a result, the magnetic field changes from "weak" to "strong" each time one game ball passes, and then changes to "weak" again. As a result, even if the game balls pass in succession, the magnetic field (the corresponding electrical signal) changes to "weak" each time one ball passes, so the game balls pass in succession. In this case, it is possible to detect the passage of a game ball for each ball and output a signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S301). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S302: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of variable display is retained in the special symbol) is acquired (S303). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S304). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S304). No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S304: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S305) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S306). The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 21) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S306, the data stored in the special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S307). In the process of S307, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S308). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S309). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S309: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S309, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S309: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S310). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, the special symbol is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be jackpot A or jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the stop of the change.

  After the processing of S310 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (the current lottery result) is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S311). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S311: Yes), the jackpot data is set based on the jackpot type (S312). Then, the start of the special symbol big hit is set (S313), and the process proceeds to S316.

  In the process of S311, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S311: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S314), and the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 If this is the case (S314: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S314: No), the process of S315 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S316.

  When the processing of S313 or S315 is completed, a stop command is set (S316), and this processing ends. The stop command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output as a voice in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 21) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of stopping the running variable display by the stop type received by the stop type command.

  Next, the special symbol change start process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S308). This special symbol change start process (S308) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of the "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 perform the lottery. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S401).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on (S402). If the probable change flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable state, and if the value of the probable change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state.

  When the value of the probable change flag 203e is on (S402: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state of the special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 per first acquired in the process of S401 and the value for the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S403). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number values stored in the special symbol big random number table for high probability. As described above, as the random number value of the special symbol which is a big hit, ten “0 to 9” are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S402, if the probability change flag 203e is off (S402: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, so that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S401 and Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S404). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number value stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for low probability. As the random number value which is a special symbol jackpot, one of "0" is set. When the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value which is a hit match, the special symbol jackpot is set. It is determined that there is. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S405.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S403 or S404 is a special symbol jackpot (S405), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot (S405: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S406). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, Among the jackpots B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the hit is big hit A (16R probability variable hit), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the big hit is obtained. B (16R time saving big hit) is determined (see FIG. 9B).

  In the process of S406, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S407). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S407, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, as the variation patterns for detachment, “outside (for long time)”, “outside (for short time)”, “outside normal reach” various types, “outside super reach” various types, and “special special reach” various types are defined. As the fluctuation patterns for jackpots, various types of "common normal reach", various types of "common super reach", and various types of "common special reach" are specified. Variation patterns of winning / losing common are various types of "common normal reach", "common" Various types of "super reach" and various types of "shared special reach" are specified.

  In the process of S405, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way (S405: No), the display mode at the time of being out of place is set (S408). In the process of S408, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviated symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, the type of stop to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, or completely out of reach.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probable change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability stop type selection table. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89”, complete out is set. If it is in the range of “90 to 97”, reach other than out of front and back is set, and “98” is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. I do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 79”, complete departure is set, and if it is in the range of “80 to 97”, reach other than departure is set. , 99 ”, the out-of-order reach is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S409). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S407, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To determine.

  When the process of S407 or S409 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S407 or S409 is set (S410). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S406 or S408 is set (S411). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 21). Is done. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S411 is completed, the special figure variation start flag 203g indicating that it is the timing to start the special symbol variation is set to ON (S412), and the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Based on the special figure change start flag 203g set in the processing of S412, it is determined in the external output processing (see FIG. 22) that it is the change start timing of the special symbol (see S1101 of FIG. 22), and the change start timing of the special symbol (S1101: Yes in FIG. 22), the variation pattern command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in the processing of S4010 is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. (See S1103 in FIG. 22). The sound ramp control device 113 transmits a display variation pattern command based on the received variation pattern command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, a variation effect based on the received command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S501). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S502). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  Then, there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S503: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S501: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S504). Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S505).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by an external output process of a main process (see FIG. 21) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. In the process (see S1108 in FIG. 22), the sound is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S505, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S506), and this processing ends. In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  In the start winning process, the lottery result in the special symbol may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in advance from the values indicated by the various random number counters acquired based on the start winning. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect based on the lottery result after the change, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), and controls the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory, and the like. This is the process to perform.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes a period during which the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a hit and a period during which the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is being performed. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended variable display in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as the first area on hold → the execution area, the second area on hold → the first area on hold, the third area on hold → the second area on hold, the fourth area on the hold → third area on hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203f during the time reduction in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203f during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the time reduction counter 203f is equal to or greater than 1 (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during a special symbol big hit, it is configured such that a lottery of a normal symbol is hard to win. That is, during a special symbol jackpot (that is, during a special game state), the player hits a ball in an attempt to win a specific winning opening 65a. However, when the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is opened, a ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a enters the first entrance 64. Therefore, it is to suppress opening of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 and to make it easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, the first entrance 64 can be prevented from entering the ball during the special jackpot. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the second random number table 202c for a high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9C).

  In the processing of S608, if the value of the during-hours reduction counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the second random number table 202c for probabilities, a lottery result on whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the second random number table 202c for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0 to 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 9C).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and when it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a symbol “「 ”is set to be lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is hitting at the present time. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory associated with the set 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the processing of S614, if the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the processing shifts to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203f during time saving is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. Since the opening period of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball enters the first entrance 64. It will be in an easy state.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighting). Display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 21) is executed next. Is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 12), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 5) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1015 of the main processing (see FIG. 21). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the processing of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12), output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001).

  Here, the details of the external output process (S1001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the external output processing (S1001). This external output processing (S1001) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 21) and is based on the presence or absence of various flags and winning detection information set in the switch reading processing in S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12). This is a process for performing the process.

  In the external output process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure change start flag 203g is on (S1101). In the processing of S1101, when it is determined that the special figure change start flag 203g is ON (S1101: Yes), it is the timing to start the change of the special symbol, and the change is performed by the above-described special symbol change start processing (see FIG. 15). Since the pattern command is set, the special fluctuation start flag 203g is set to off (S1102), and the fluctuation pattern command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1103). ). Then, control proceeds to the process of S1104.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the special figure change start flag 203g is off (S1101: No), it is not the timing to start the change of the special symbol, so the processing of S1102 and S1103 is skipped. The process proceeds to S1104.

  In the process of S1104, it is determined whether or not there is a foul winning command (S1104). If it is determined that there is a foul winning command (S1104: Yes), a foul winning command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. At the same time, a signal is output to the terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the foul ball winning command (S1105). When the payout control device 111 receives the foul winning command, the payout motor 216 is controlled so as to pay out a prize ball (one ball in the present embodiment) according to the command. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no foul winning command in the process of S1104 (S1104: No), the process of S1105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1106.

  In the process of S1106, it is determined whether or not there is an error command (S1106). If it is determined that there is an error command (S1106: Yes), the error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the external A signal is output to a terminal of the output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command (S1107). Here, examples of the error command include an error command (S1213 or S1215 in FIG. 23) set in the incoming ball abnormality determination process (see FIG. 23) described later. The destination to which the error command is sent may be changed according to the type of the error command. For example, an error command for stopping the payout of award balls may be transmitted to the payout control unit 111. . By transmitting an error command to stop payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 111 when an illegal action is detected, the payout by the payout control device 111 can be stopped.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S1106 (S1106: No), the process of S1107 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1108.

  In the process of S1108, a command other than the above-described command is transmitted. As a command other than the above-described command, for example, based on the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process (see S101 in FIG. 12), if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of acquired balls. Send the prize ball command. In addition, a command for the number of retained balls set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) and the start winning process (see FIG. 16) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the variation pattern command is transmitted by the processing of S1103 described above, thereafter, a stop type command for stopping the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. .

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. After the processing of S1001, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the first variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the first variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the game ball is illegally entered into the foul winning opening 601. A ball entry abnormality determination process for detecting an illegal action is executed (S1004).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the details of the incoming ball abnormality determination process (S1004) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball abnormality determination process (S1004). This entry abnormality determination processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the number of shot game balls and the number of game balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 are provided. This is a process for detecting an abnormal ball entry into the foul winning opening 601 or an illegal act based on the above.

  In the entry abnormality determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201). The timer counting flag 203n is set to ON by the processing of S1205 described later, and is set to OFF after a predetermined time (20 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1218). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is ON (S1201: Yes), the timer counter 203m for measuring a predetermined time is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the timer counting flag 203n is off (S1201: No), the ball entry flag 203h is turned on to determine whether a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. It is determined whether or not there is (S1203). In the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is not turned on (S1203: No), there is no game ball entered into the foul winning opening 601 and it is not during the period for judging an abnormal ball entry. The process ends.

  In the process of S1203, when it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1203: Yes), the timer counter 203m is set to 5000 (corresponding to 20 seconds) to start the ball entry abnormality determination ( (S1204), the timer count flag 203n is set to ON (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  When the processing of S1202 or S1205 is completed, it is determined whether or not the ball entry flag 203h is on (S1206). In the processing of S1206, when it is determined that the ball entry flag 203h is ON (S1206: Yes), it is a case where a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 during the ball entry abnormality determination period. The counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1207), the entry flag 203h is set to off (S1208), and the process shifts to S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1206 that the incoming flag 203h is off (S1206: No), the processing of S1207 and S1208 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1209.

  In the processing of S1209, it is determined whether or not the firing flag 203i is on (S1209). In the processing of S1209, if it is determined that the firing flag 203i is ON (S1209: Yes), it means that a game ball has been fired during the abnormal ball entry determination period, and thus the fired ball counter 203k is incremented by one. Then (S1210), the firing flag 203i is set to off (S1211), and the process shifts to S1212. On the other hand, in the processing of S1209, when it is determined that the firing flag 203i is off (S1209: No), the processing of S1210 and S1211 is skipped and the processing shifts to S1212.

  Next, a ball entry abnormality is determined based on a ball entry number counter 203j corresponding to the number of game balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 and a shot ball number counter 203k corresponding to the number of shot game balls. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball number counter 203j is larger than the value obtained by adding the predetermined value X (2 in this embodiment) to the value of the number of fired ball number counter 203k (S1212). In the process of S1212, as a result of comparing the number of game balls normally fired and the number of game balls entered into the foul winning opening 601, the game ball entered into the foul winning opening 601 is more normally fired. It is determined whether or not there are two more balls (three or more balls) than the game balls. If it is determined that there are many (S1212: Yes), an error command is set (S1213), assuming that an illegal act such as illegally entering a game ball into the foul winning opening 601 is performed (S1213). The process moves to S1217.

  Here, the reason why the predetermined value X is provided in the above-described incoming ball abnormality determination processing will be described. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, an abnormal entry determination is started, and the number of launched balls counter 203 k and the number of entered balls counter 203 j are counted. For this reason, the game balls that trigger the start of the abnormal ball entry determination are not counted by the launched ball counter 203k. Also, at the timing when the ball entry abnormality determination is started, a game ball fired by the ball launching unit 112a has already been left in the launch path 701, and it is considered that the game ball may enter the foul winning opening 601. Can be In consideration of such an assumed error, a predetermined value X is provided so that error processing is executed when a clear abnormal state is detected. Accordingly, in the above-described case where the value of the number-of-launches counter 203j is larger than the value of the number-of-launched-balls counter 203k, no error processing is performed, even though no cheating has been performed. Unnecessary error notification can be suppressed. Note that the predetermined value X is not limited to the above-described one, and may be a value smaller than 2 (for example, 1) or a value larger than 2 (for example, 5). Further, the predetermined value X need not be set.

  The error command set in the process of S1213 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output process (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to a corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. Is done. By receiving the error command, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute sound output and screen display indicating that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of fired balls. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to notify the employee of the hall or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of shot balls. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1212 that the number is not large (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-entry counter 203j is larger than 10 (S1214). When the value of the number-of-entered-balls counter 203j is greater than the predetermined value Y (10 in the present embodiment) (S1214: Yes), the number of game balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is greater than the number of launched game balls. This is a case where the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is large although the number of balls has not increased. Here, when playing the game, if the player is trying to execute the game normally, no more than 10 game balls enter the foul winning opening 601 within a predetermined time (20 seconds). Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1217.

  The error command set by the processing of S1215 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-described external output processing (see FIG. 22), and a signal is output to a corresponding terminal of the external output terminal board 261 corresponding to the error command. Is done. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the sound output and the screen display indicating that the number of foul winnings is large by receiving the error command. In addition, since the signal output to the external output terminal board 261 is detected by the hall computer 262, it is possible to notify the employee of the hall or the like through the hall computer 262 that the number of foul winnings is large.

  In the processing of S1214, when it is determined that the number-of-entry counter 203j is equal to or less than the predetermined value Y (10) (S1214: No), a timer is used to determine whether it is the end timing of the abnormal entry pitch determination period. It is determined whether the counter 203m is 0 (S1216). If it is determined that the timer counter 203m is 0 (S1216: Yes), it is the end timing of the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), and the process proceeds to S1217 to determine that the timer counter 203m is not 0. If it has been performed (S1216: No), the ball entry abnormality determination is continuously performed, and thus this process is terminated as it is.

  When the processing of S1213, S1215 or S1216 is completed, various counter values are reset (S1217). Specifically, when an error command is set by the process of S1213 or S1215, or when it is determined by the process of S1216 that it is the end timing of the ball entry abnormality determination period (S1216: Yes), the entry abnormality determination is performed. In order to end the process, the number-of-entry-balls counter 203j, the number-of-fired-balls counter 203k, and the timer counter 203m are reset to zero. Next, the timer counting flag 203n is set to off (S1218), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the ball entry abnormality determination process (S1004) of the present embodiment, an error command is set when it is determined that the entry is abnormal during the entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds). . Thus, occurrence of an abnormality can be detected at an early stage. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to determine whether or not there is an abnormality after the elapse of the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds). In this case, the abnormality can be determined after acquiring the information necessary for the abnormality determination for the ball entry abnormality determination period (20 seconds), so that the accuracy of the abnormality determination can be improved and the unnecessary abnormality is notified. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 and the number of fired game balls that have been fired are counted in the ball entry abnormality determination processing (S1004), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the count may be performed in another process such as a process executed in a timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the method of judging an abnormality in entering a ball is not limited to the above-described methods and combinations. For example, an abnormality may be determined by only one of the abnormality determinations in S1212 and S1214, or another abnormality determination may be performed. You may make it add. The other abnormality determination is to determine, for example, a case where the interval at which the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 is on average earlier than the interval at which the game ball can be fired (0.6 seconds in the present embodiment). And the like.

  Further, the trigger for starting the ball entry abnormality determination is not limited to the one triggered by the entry of a game ball into the foul winning opening 601, but may be, for example, a measurement at predetermined time intervals.

  In the present embodiment, the abnormality is determined by counting the number of game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 and the number of game balls that have been fired. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The abnormality may be determined using the result of counting the number of game balls entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 67) and the out entrance 66. For example, with respect to the counted number of game balls fired, the counted number of game balls that entered the foul winning opening 601 and the counted number of game balls launched into the game area without entering the foul winning opening 601 May be determined to be abnormal when the total value of.

  Further, when there is a continuous ball entry into the foul winning opening 601 and the abnormal ball entry determination is performed again (when the abnormal ball entry determination period is reached after the end of the abnormal ball entry determination period), an illegal act is performed. It is likely that it has been done. On the other hand, in the case where the entering ball abnormality determination period is the first time immediately after the start of the game, it is highly likely that the player has mistakenly made a prize winning when starting to hit. Therefore, in the first ball entry abnormality determination after the game is started, the threshold value for determining that there is a ball entry abnormality is set high (for example, 15 balls or more are determined to be abnormal in S1214), and it is difficult to make the abnormality determination. In the abnormal ball entry determination, the threshold value for determining that there is an abnormal ball entry may be lowered (for example, five or more balls are determined to be abnormal in S1214) to facilitate the abnormality determination. This makes it possible to accurately detect fraudulent activity while suppressing unnecessary error notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of items to be determined in the first and subsequent ball entry abnormality determinations may be increased from the first time (for example, only the first time is determined in S1212, and the first transition is determined in S1212 and S1214). In the subsequent ball entry abnormality determination, the threshold value and the determination item may be changed stepwise. Further, after the timer counter becomes 0 (S1216 in FIG. 23: Yes), while the timer count flag is ON (during the abnormal ball entry determination period), the number of entry counters becomes larger than a predetermined value Y (10 in this embodiment). A process of determining whether the value is larger than a small predetermined value Z (for example, 5) may be added. Even with these processes, it is possible to improve the effect that it is possible to accurately detect fraudulent activity while suppressing unnecessary error notification.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the error command is set to one. However, the error command may be set in a plurality of stages according to the possibility of the illegal game being performed. In such a case, in addition to the above-described ball entry abnormality determination processing, the determination may be performed using a pattern in which the determination value (determination value) is set low. By doing so, in addition to outputting that the illegal game is being performed, a minor error command such as a situation where the player is operating the operation handle 51 by mistake or a malfunction of the operation handle 51 is set. By transmitting the sound to the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to give a game explanation ("Please turn the operation handle more") by voice or liquid crystal display, or to notify a malfunction of the operation handle.

  Specifically, the timing at which the player operates the operating handle 51 to change the firing intensity (at the start of a game, at the start of a right hit game, at the end of a right hit game, etc.) is defined as the timing at which the abnormal ball entry process is started. The game balls that have entered the foul winning opening 601 during a predetermined period therefrom are counted. If the counted value is larger than the predetermined value, there is a possibility that the launching device has a problem, so that the fact can be output. With such a configuration, it is possible to not only monitor the illegal game, but also determine a malfunction of the operation handle 51. When both the malfunction determination of the operation handle 51 and the monitoring of the illegal game are performed, a plurality of determination results of the abnormal ball entry determination process may be stored and determined in a time series. That is, in the case of the ball entering the foul winning opening 601 due to the malfunction of the operation handle 51, it repeatedly occurs unless the operation handle 51 is repaired. This is because it occurs within the specified period.

  Desirably, the abnormal ball entry determination based on the illegal game has a strict determination value for the abnormal ball entry determination and shortens the period used for the determination. It is preferable that the determination value used for the determination is lower than the value used for the determination of the illegal game, and the period used for the determination is made longer. In this way, both can make the determination.

  Further, the timing at which the firing intensity is changed is set to the timing at which the abnormal incoming ball processing is started. However, it is preferable that the abnormal incoming ball processing is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the change of the firing intensity. The reason that the predetermined time has elapsed is that this prevents the detection of a game ball fired before the firing intensity is changed, and the game ball and the firing intensity changed before the firing intensity is changed. This is to prevent a game ball that has been fired after being hit and colliding with the game ball to an unintended area, thereby preventing such a game ball from being detected.

  The timing at which the malfunction of the operation handle 51 is determined is not limited to the above-described timing, and may be performed at all times, or may be performed during a state in which a firing instruction is issued so that the firing intensity becomes a predetermined value or more.

  Further, it is preferable that the content of notification to the outside when the malfunction of the operation handle is determined be changed according to the gaming state (whether or not a big hit is occurring). For example, if a big hit is in progress, the notification priority may be increased so that the clerk can come immediately. The process of changing the notification content in this manner may be performed by the main control device using information based on the determination result of the incoming ball abnormality determination and information based on the gaming state of the gaming machine, or may be a voice that acquires the respective information. The lamp control device may do so. Further, storage means for storing information based on the fact that the malfunction of the operation handle is determined during the big hit may be provided.

  In the above-described ball entry abnormality determination processing, the number of balls entered into the foul winning opening 601 is counted, and the entry abnormality determination is performed based on the counted result. Such control may be performed.

  That is, the ball entry flag 203h and the firing flag 203i may be constantly read from the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the ball entry abnormality may be determined based on the timing when each flag is turned on.

  Specifically, it may be determined that the ball entry abnormality is determined when the entry flag 203h is turned on while the firing flag 203i is not turned on. This is to determine a state in which a gaming ball has entered the foul winning opening 601 even though the gaming ball has not been fired.

  In addition, since there is a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) from when the game ball is fired to when it reaches the foul winning opening 601, the firing flag 203 i is turned on a predetermined time before the timing when the firing flag 203 i is turned on. It is good to judge whether it becomes. By doing so, it is possible to more reliably determine an incoming ball abnormality.

  Further, the timing of the predetermined time is started at the timing when the game ball enters the foul winning opening 601, that is, at the timing when the entering flag 203 h is turned on, and until the predetermined time (0.6 seconds) elapses. It may be determined that a game ball has entered the foul winning opening 601. By doing so, it is possible to detect a state in which the game ball is entering the foul winning opening 601 at a timing shorter than the interval at which the game ball is fired by the operation handle 51 (0.6 seconds).

  When the foul spheres are continuously generated, the foul spheres may be connected in a daisy chain in the firing path 701. Therefore, the predetermined time may be appropriately set, and may be shorter than 0.6 second. Further, an abnormal ball entry may be determined based on a state in which a game ball enters the foul winning opening 601 within a predetermined time is detected a plurality of times. By doing so, the accuracy of monitoring the illegal game can be further improved.

  Further, a game area reaching ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the fired game ball has reached the game area is provided near the end of the firing path 701, and a foul winning switch 208a, a firing ball detection switch 208b, The passing state of the launched game balls may be detected based on the detection results of the three switches of the game area reaching ball detection switches. By doing so, the accuracy of monitoring whether the detection result of the foul winning switch 208a is based on a normal game or an unauthorized game can be further improved.

  Specifically, the game ball detected by the shooting ball detection switch 208a passes either the foul winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch after a predetermined time. Therefore, timing of a predetermined time is started at the timing when the shooting ball detection switch 208a detects a game ball, and when the foul winning switch 208a or the game area reaching ball detection switch detects a game ball within the predetermined time, the detection is performed. Is determined to be normal, and at other times, that is, when the foul winning switch 208a and the game area reaching ball detection switch both detect a game ball within the predetermined time, and when the foul ball is detected outside the predetermined time. When the winning switch 208 detects a game ball, the above-described ball entry abnormality determination process is started. By doing in this way, it is possible to determine that the game ball detected by the launch ball detection switch 208a has reached the game area, that is, that the game ball is playing an illegal game while playing a normal game. Become.

  When such control is used, a plurality of areas (storable for four balls) may be provided for storing the detection result of the fired ball detection switch 208b. This is because the newly fired ball is fired by the fired ball detection switch 208b from when it is detected by the fired ball detection switch 208b to when it passes through the foul winning switch 208a or the game area arrival ball detection switch. To pass through.

  As described above, even if a switch for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at each position on the firing path, and the detection state of each switch is detected, the function for counting the detection result of each switch is not provided. It is possible to achieve the same object and effect as the ball entry abnormality determination processing described in the present embodiment. In the description of the control described above, the description of the same portions as the ball entry abnormality determination processing of this embodiment (see FIG. 23) is omitted, but the ball entry abnormality determination processing of this embodiment (see FIG. 23). ) Or may be provided independently.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. When the process of S1004 is completed, then, if the special symbol is in the state of the jackpot, the execution of the jackpot effect and the jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 are executed (S1005). . In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or the ball has won a specified number. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  In the big hit control process (S1005), a command based on the big hit state of the special symbol is set. For example, an opening command is set when the special symbol jackpot starts, and an ending command is set when the special symbol jackpot ends.

  The jackpot-related command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 21) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When receiving the jackpot-related command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a corresponding display command to the display control device 114. When a display command is received by the display control device 114, a corresponding jackpot-related effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round in the jackpot game, the specific winning opening 65a is opened. When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round, a round number command indicating the number of rounds may be set and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Accordingly, the start timing of a new round can be determined in the audio lamp control device 113, and the music and the effect can be changed in accordance with the start of the new round.

  At the end of the big hit game, a probability change flag 203e and a time reduction counter 203f are set based on the type of the special symbol being hit. Specifically, when the jackpot game with the jackpot A (probably variable jackpot) is being executed, the probability change flag 203e is set to ON, and when the jackpot game with the jackpot B (hour-saving jackpot) is being executed, the middle-hour game is being executed. The counter 203f is set to 100. As a result, the probable change game state is provided based on the jackpot A, and the time-saving game state is provided based on the jackpot B.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 17). The opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 or S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted every time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S407 or the process of S409 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S406 or the process of S408 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 17), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 17). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1009, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 19 has been executed, the processing at S1013 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the initial processing of the startup processing (see FIG. 20) is performed. In the setting process (S901), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag 223x is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”). It is determined whether or not the process has been started during the execution of (see S1302) (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 25), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1416. The power-off processing flag 223x is turned on before the execution of the power-off processing, and the power-off processing flag 223x is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1416 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag 223x.

  If the power-off processing flag 223x is off (S1302: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and It is started after the execution of the power-off processing is completed, or is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). It is. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1304. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1416 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the flow shifts to S1308.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1416, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1306). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on at the time of executing the power-off process in S1416 (see S1416 in FIG. 25). In other words, the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process in S1416 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is on is instantaneous in this startup process. This is a case where the power supply is started after the occurrence of a power failure and the execution of the power-off process in S1416 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to off (S1310). Then, after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), the CPU sets interrupt permission (S1312) and shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1308 is reached when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process from step S1304 to step S1306 is performed. Or the process is started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), the processing skips S1309 and S1310, which are the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the processing to S1311, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1311), and then permits interruption. Is set (S1312), and the routine goes to a main process.

  The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process from S1304 to the process of S1308 is performed via the process of S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1401 was executed (S1401). If not (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1412 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1411. In the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S1402 to S1411 is mainly related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1412, the variable display setting process of S1413, and the process of updating the counter values of S1413 and S1414 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1413 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1403 to S1413 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1402). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1408 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1404). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a display control command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1408), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1409, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process in S1410, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from main controller 110 is executed (S1411). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1412 is completed, a variable display setting process is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect (S1412). Specifically, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing in S1412 ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1413). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1413 (S1413: Yes), both the power-off flag 223y and the power-off processing flag 223x are turned on (S1415), and the power-off processing is executed (S1416). . After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag 223x is turned off (S1417), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1413 (S1413: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1414), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1414: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1414: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1411). This command determination process (S1411) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this process, when receiving the number-of-retained-balls command from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous announcement effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S1501). When a variation pattern command is received (S1501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1502), and a variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1503). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 27) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1504). When the stop type command is received (S1504: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1506). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 27) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1504: No), then it is determined whether an error command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1507). If an error command has been received (S1507: Yes), error processing (such as setting of a display error command) according to the received command is executed (S1508), and this processing ends.

  Here, the error command in the present embodiment is a case where it is determined in the above-described ball entry abnormality determination processing (see FIG. 23) executed by main controller 110 that the number of foul winnings is larger than the number of shot balls. At least, and an error command (S1215) set when it is determined that the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 is large.

  Specifically, in the processing of S1508, when the error command set in the processing of S1213 is received, the setting is made so as to output a sound that "the number of fouls is greater than the number of firings", and " The number of fouls is greater than the number of characters "is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the error command set in the processing of S1215 is received, the voice of "the number of fouls" is set to be output and the character "the number of fouls" is displayed in the third symbol. A display error command to be displayed on the device 81 is set. The present invention is not limited to this, and the sound to be set may be an alarm sound (for example, a sound such as “peep-peep”). ) May be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the abnormality is configured to be notified in a manner recognizable to surrounding players. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is notified in a mode that can be recognized only by employees of the hall (for example, A specific LED may emit light), or the occurrence of an abnormality may be notified only by a hall computer without performing notification by voice or screen display. Thereby, fraud monitoring can be performed without the player being informed that fraud monitoring is being performed.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When receiving the display error command, the display control device 114 starts an error display corresponding to the command on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1507, if no error command has been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed (S1509). ), And return to the main processing. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the display control device 114. Set the command so that it is sent to Other commands include, for example, the above-mentioned opening command and the number of retained balls command.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1412). This variable display setting process (S1412) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. In order to execute a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1606. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then, in the process of S1303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  When the processing of S1604 ends, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1605). In the process of S1605, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. After shifting the data, the flow shifts to the processing of S1606.

  In the processing of S1606, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1606). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1606: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the variable display setting process is terminated. Return to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1606: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1607). Then, in the process of S1506 of the command determination process (see FIG. 26), The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1608).

  Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1609). To end. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of handling a foul ball generated when a player plays a game, a situation in which a foul winning opening 601 is provided and the player can play the game again by paying out with the award ball. Because it does not require a dedicated passage for returning foul balls as in the past, it is possible to use the vacant space for another mechanism, and it is possible to freely design a gaming machine. It is possible to increase the degree. In particular, when the foul winning opening 601 is provided on the game board 13 and the payout control device 111, the upper plate 17, and the ball firing unit 112a are provided on the inner frame 12 side, the components are transferred from the game board 13 side to the inner frame 12 side. It is necessary to provide a passage for returning the foul ball so as to straddle it, and such a gaming machine is more effective.

  Further, by providing the foul winning port 601 at a position using the gravity flow of the foul ball in the firing path 701, the foul ball can be easily branched from the firing path 701.

  Further, since a branch path to the foul winning opening 601 is provided so as to avoid an area where the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a passes, the game is not hindered.

  Further, even if the foul winning opening 601 is provided at a position closer to the ball launching unit 112a than the winning opening provided in the game area, a structure for preventing improper operation by the threaded ball or a control for monitoring the improper operation. , It is possible to deal with fraudulently.

<First Modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The first modified example is different from the first embodiment described above in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed, the guide member is removed, and the number of paths of game balls that can enter the foul winning opening 601 is increased. It is otherwise identical. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the first modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is directed to the foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. Also, among the game balls that have reached the game area from the first opening 603 of the firing path 701, game balls having extremely low firing strength flow down a special flow path provided on the inner peripheral side of the inner rail 61 and fall foul winning openings 601. It is possible to win a prize.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the outer rail 62, and is thereafter guided to the game area along the outer rail 62. In other words, in the first modified example, since the launched game balls pass through the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the launched game balls pass through the inner side of the launch path where the launched game balls cannot enter. Is provided with a second opening.

  As described above, in the first modified example, since the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, it is not necessary to provide the guide member 605.

  The foul sphere generated on the end side of the firing path 701 flows down the firing path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602.

  As described above, in the first modified example, in the configuration in which the foul winning opening 601 in which the foul ball can enter is provided in order to allow the game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a to smoothly reach the game area. There is no need to add a new configuration. Further, even in the case of a game ball that has reached the game area, it is possible to handle a game ball that has a very low firing intensity and is fired at a position that is not suitable for a game, like a foul ball. In order to more reliably guide the foul ball generated above the second opening 604 to the second opening 604, the second opening 604 may be provided at the upper left chord position. By doing so, the falling of the foul ball by its own weight acts, and the foul ball flows down to the second opening 604 more reliably.

<Second modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 are removed, and FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a foul ball entering path 606. The second modified example is different from the first embodiment described above in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the second modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is directed to the foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area. It is configured to enter the ball. Further, a foul ball entering path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of acrylic resin having high transparency, and is configured so that a player can visually recognize a game ball flowing on the back side of the game board 13.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the outer rail 62, and is thereafter guided to the game area along the outer rail 62. In other words, in the second modified example, since the launched game balls pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the launched game balls pass through the inner side of the launch path on which the launched game balls cannot enter. Is provided with a second opening.

  As described above, in the second modification, the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, so that the guide member 605 does not need to be provided.

  The foul sphere generated on the end side of the firing path 701 flows down the firing path and is guided to the second opening 604 by the guide member 602. Next, a configuration in which a game ball guided by the guide member 602 flows down to a foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area will be described with reference to FIG.

  30A is an enlarged view of a region XXIX in FIG. 29, FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view taken along a line XXXa-XXXa in FIG. 30A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing in the XXXb-XXXb line of FIG. The foul sphere generated on the end side of the firing area 701 flows down between the guide member 602 and the inner rail 61 and is guided on the ball receiving member 606a. The ball receiving member 606a has a downward inclination toward the right side, that is, the direction toward the inner rail 61 in the front view of FIG. 30A, and a downward inclination toward the second opening 604 provided in the game board 13. (See FIG. 30C). Therefore, the game ball on the ball receiving member 606a passes through the second opening 604 provided in the game board 13 along the formed downward slope (see FIG. 30B). The game ball that has passed through the second opening 604 rolls on the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board 13 and is discharged from the outlet 600d provided in the game area of the game board 13 to the game area, where the foul ball wins. Guided to mouth 601. In the second modified example, the game board is formed of acrylic resin having high permeability, and the passage 606c is also formed of the same member. It is configured to be visible from the side.

  By providing a structure for guiding the foul ball to the foul winning opening 601 on the back side of the game board 13 instead of the front face as in the second modification, a limited front space of the game board 13, that is, the range of the game area , It will be easier to incorporate ideas to improve the interest of the game.

  In the second modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the foul winning opening 601 is provided in the game area of the game board 13, but may be provided in another place. . For example, the second opening 604 may be provided on the outer peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the foul winning opening 601 may be provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 32). By doing so, there is no need to provide a foul winning port 601 for allowing a foul ball to enter a game area provided on the front surface of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at the foul winning opening 601.

  Further, the launch path 701 is configured to have a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction (depth direction), and the game balls fired by the ball firing unit 112a have one game ball on the back side (the game board 13 side). You may comprise so that it can be fired in the state which maintained the space | interval which can pass a ball. In this way, when an opening is provided in the game board 13, the width direction of the firing path 701 can be narrowed, and the left-right direction (width direction) of the game board 13 can be used effectively. I can do it.

<Third Modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The third modified example is different from the first embodiment described above in that the position of the second opening 604 is changed and the guide member is removed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the third modification, the second opening 604 is provided on the inner peripheral side of the firing path 701, and the foul sphere flowing down the second opening 604 is formed between the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. The ball passes through the second opening 604 formed therebetween and enters the foul winning opening 601.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the outer rail 62, and is thereafter guided to the game area along the outer rail 62. In other words, in the third modified example, since the launched game balls pass along the outer peripheral side of the launch path, the launched game balls cannot pass through the inner side of the launch path where the launched game balls cannot enter. Is provided with a second opening.

  As described above, in the second modification, the second opening 604 is not provided at the position where the shot game ball rolls, so that the guide member 605 does not need to be provided.

  Further, the inner rail 61 is divided into a first inner rail 61a and a second inner rail 61b, and a gap such that a game ball can pass through one ball is formed by a lower end portion of the first inner rail 61a and the second inner rail 61b. By forming the second opening 604, the gap can form the second opening 604, and the foul ball can enter the foul winning opening 601 without using the guide member 602.

<Fourth modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fourth modified example is a further modified example of the second modified example described above, and is different in that the position of the second opening 604, the position of the foul winning opening 601 is changed, and a guide member 605 is added. It is otherwise identical. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the fourth modified example, the second opening 604 is provided on the outer peripheral side in the firing path 701, and the foul ball flowing down the second opening 604 is provided in the lower right area of the game board 13 in the foul winning. The ball enters the mouth 601. Further, a foul ball entering path 606 guides a foul ball to a foul winning opening 601 provided in the game area through the back side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 30). The game board 13 is made of acrylic resin having high transparency, and is configured so that a player can visually recognize a game ball flowing on the back side of the game board 13. Further, since the passage 606c provided on the back side of the game board is provided from the left end to the right end of the game board 13, the game ball path from the ball launching unit 112a to the foul winning opening 601 is provided in the game area. It can be made longer than the mouth (not shown), and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the foul winning opening 601.

  The flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 will be described. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605, after which the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 and the game area. It is led to. That is, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. The foul sphere generated on the terminal end side in the firing path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the firing path 701 due to its own weight.

  By providing a structure for guiding a foul ball to the foul winning opening 601 on the back side of the game board 13 instead of the front face as in the fourth modification, a limited front space of the game board 13, that is, a range of the game area is provided. , It will be easier to incorporate ideas to improve the interest of the game.

  By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a foul winning opening 601 for allowing a foul ball to enter a game area provided on the front face of the game board 13. Further, by increasing the distance of the passage 606c passing through the back side of the game board 13, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at the foul winning opening 601.

<Fifth modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. The fifth modified example is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the position at which the ball launching unit 903 is installed is changed and the change accompanying the change is performed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the pachinko machine 10 described in the fifth modified example, the game balls used for the game are collected by the collection path 901, and the collected game balls are fired at the upper left of the pachinko machine 10 by the lifting lift 902. This is a gaming machine of a system in which a game ball is discharged to a unit 903 and a shooting ball is fired to a game area by a firing solenoid 904.

  In such a pachinko machine 10, there is no need to provide a firing path 701 for allowing a game ball to reach a game area, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be utilized as a game area to the maximum. However, since the game ball is fired from the firing solenoid provided at the upper left of the pachinko machine 10, there is no space for providing a member (the firing rail 801 in the first embodiment) for stabilizing the fired game ball. There is a possibility that the game balls that are fired may vary. Therefore, a foul winning opening 601 is provided in a specific area in which a game ball not suitable for a game flows in the game area. By doing in this way, even if the player has aimed at a predetermined location, the player can play the game again without having to use a single game ball that has been fired to a specific area other than the predetermined location. You can do so.

<Sixth modification>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 removed. A sixth modification is a function (so-called replay function) of causing the foul ball winning port 601 to perform a game again as a result of a game by a game ball falling under its own weight in the game area in addition to the purpose of entering the foul ball. ), And is a pachinko machine 10 capable of providing new gaming properties. The sixth modified example is a further modified example of the above-described first modified example, in which the second opening 604, the number of the guide members 602, and a game ball falling by its own weight in the game area 602 enters the foul winning opening 601. The difference is that the path to the ball is changed, and the other points are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals or omitted from the drawings, and detailed description thereof is also omitted. In particular, the game board 13 has various components similar to those of the first embodiment described above, but is not shown.

  In the sixth modified example, a plurality of (two) second openings 604 are provided, and the ball is generated by the ball firing unit 112a by branching the foul sphere generated in the firing path 701 from the firing path 701 quickly. It prevents collision with game balls. Also, a buffer member 608 for preventing the game ball dropped by its own weight from the game area from entering the firing path 701 from the second opening 604 and preventing the guide member 602 from being damaged is provided in the second opening 604. Is provided.

  A description will be given of a flow of a game ball in the launch path 701 characteristic of the sixth modification. The game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a jumps over the gap 802 from the firing rail 801 and reaches the guide member 605, after which the game ball rolled along the guide member 605 jumps over the second opening 604 and the game area. It is led to. That is, in the fourth modified example, the shot game ball is guided by the guide member 605 so as not to fall into the second opening 604 and reaches the game area. The foul sphere generated on the terminal end side in the firing path 701 passes through the second opening provided at the lower left chord position of the firing path 701 due to its own weight.

  Although a plurality of modified examples have been described above, other configurations may be used without being limited thereto. For example, the members constituting the foul winning opening 601 may be integrally provided on the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 constituting the launching path 701, or the foul winning opening 601 may be provided within the launching path 701.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first to sixth modifications which are modifications of the first embodiment and the first embodiment described above, a foul winning opening 601 in which a foul ball can enter is provided, and a firing intensity that does not reach the game area is provided. The launched game ball is configured to be returned to the player by a prize ball based on the ball entering the foul winning opening 601.

  In the first embodiment described above, it is configured such that an improper act such as illegally entering the foul winning opening 601 can be detected based on the number of balls entering the foul winning opening 601 and the number of launched game balls. ing. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the control processing of the first embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the emission intensity is adjusted to be a foul sphere.

  Specifically, in a game state (right-handed game state) on which it is assumed that the game area is fired to the right side of the game area, such as a probable change game state or a time reduction game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 moves the game ball to the right side of the game area. When the intensity is insufficient to fire (in this control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the firing intensity in which the game ball to be fired becomes a foul ball (in this control example, the operation amount corresponds to 20%) To the desired firing intensity).

  This prevents the game ball from being fired to the left side of the game area due to a player's operation error or the like despite the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed or unintentionally won. Disadvantage, such as inviting the player, can be suppressed.

<Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine in Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a part of the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is changed, and the other points are the same. Specifically, the difference is that a firing permission flag 203r and a handle operation amount 203s are newly provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The other points are the same, and the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  The firing permission flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not firing is permitted. When the firing permission flag 203r is on, it indicates that firing is permitted. On the other hand, when the firing permission flag 203r is off, , Indicating that firing is not allowed. The firing permission flag 203r is turned on when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110. (S222 in FIG. 36). It is referred to in the firing control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interruption process of the main control device 110, and when the firing permission flag 203r is on, in order to fire the game ball from the ball firing unit 112a. , And transmits the firing command to the payout control device 111. Upon receiving the firing command, the payout control device 111 transmits a firing command based on the command to the firing control device 112, and the firing control device 112 causes the ball firing unit to fire a game ball based on the received firing command. 112a is controlled.

  The operation amount storage area 203s is an area for storing the operation amount of the operation handle 51, and stores a value of 0 to 100. This value indicates the operation position (angle from the origin position) with respect to the movable range (movable angle) of the operation handle 51 in percentage. For example, if the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 0, it indicates that the operation handle 51 is not operated (the position of the origin), and if the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 100, the operation handle 51 is not. 51 indicates that it is fully opened (operable upper limit position).

  In the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110, the manipulated variable storage area 203s is used when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off. The above-described firing permission flag 203r is set to ON (see S222 in FIG. 36), and the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (see S223 in FIG. 36). The firing command is set based on the value of the operation amount storage area 203s, which is referred to in the firing control process (see FIG. 37) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 (see S2005 in FIG. 37). ). Further, in the present control example, when the game is in the right-handed gaming state and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80, it is determined that the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 20, and the firing command is issued. Is set. Accordingly, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area (in the present control example, the operation amount is 80% or less), the game ball to be fired is fouled. The firing intensity can be adjusted to be a sphere (in this control example, the operation amount is 20%).

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, a control process of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a part of the switch reading process and the emission control process is changed, and the other portions are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 36, details of the switch reading process (S101) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S101). The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the firing permission flag 203r and the value of the operation amount storage area 203s are set based on the state of the touch sensor 51a and the stop flag 51b. Different, the other parts are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the switch reading process, first, the processes of S201 to S206 are executed as in the first embodiment. Next, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 51a is on (S220). In the processing of S220, when it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is not turned on (S220: No), it is a case where the game ball is about to be fired without being based on the operation of the player, and the game ball is illegally fired. Since it is highly likely that the game ball is about to be fired, the process from S221 to SS223 is skipped so as not to allow the launch of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

  On the other hand, in the process of S220, if it is determined that the touch sensor 51a is on (S220: Yes), it means that the game ball is about to be fired based on the operation of the player. It is determined whether or not 51b is off (S221). In the processing of S221, if it is determined that the stop switch 51b is on (S221), the player has turned on the stop switch 51b to temporarily stop the launch of the game ball. Then, the process of S222 and SS223 is skipped so as not to permit the launch of the game ball, and the process proceeds to S207.

  In the process of S221, when it is determined that the stop switch 51 is off (S221: No), the process proceeds to the process of S222 to permit the launch of the game ball. In the process of S222, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON (S222), the value of the operation amount detection switch 51c is stored in the operation amount storage area 203s (S223), and the process proceeds to S207.

  In the process of S207, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the process of reading the other switches is executed, and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the launch control process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the firing control process (S108). The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that, when the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state, the configuration is such that the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted, and other parts are the same. It is. As for the same part, there is a part in which the details of the processing are clearly shown in the present control example, and that part is also described.

  In the firing control process, first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag 203r is on (S2001). As described above, the firing permission flag 203r is set to ON when the touch sensor 51a is ON and the stop switch 51b is OFF in the switch reading process (see FIG. 36) ( See S222 in FIG. 36).

  In the processing of S2001, when it is determined that the firing permission flag 203r is turned off (S2001: No), when there is no operation of the operation handle 51 by the player, or when the game ball is being illegally fired, etc. Since the game ball is not fired, the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the firing permission flag 203r is ON (S2001: Yes), the processing shifts to the processing of S2002 in order to fire a game ball. In the process of S2002, it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (S2002). More specifically, in the present control example, after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A (16R probability change jackpot) is completed, the probability change game state is given by setting the probability change flag 203e to ON, and the jackpot B (16R time reduction jackpot) After the end of the jackpot game based on, the time-saving game state is given by setting the time-saving medium counter 203f to 100. In the probable change game state or the time reduction game state, since the player enters a right-handed game state in which the player plays a game by firing a game ball to the right side of the game area, the probability change flag 203e is turned on or the counter 203f during the time reduction is set. It is determined whether or not the game is in the right-handed gaming state depending on whether it is 1 or more.

  If it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the game is not in the right-handed gaming state (S2002: No), a firing command is set based on the value of the operation amount storage area 203s in order to execute normal firing control. Move on to processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2002 that the game is in the right-handed game state (S2002: Yes), the operation amount storage area 203s is determined in order to determine whether or not the firing intensity of the game ball needs to be adjusted. Is determined to be in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003). Here, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is less than 30 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is less than 30%), the firing intensity is weak, and the launched game ball does not reach the game area. In this case, the ball enters the foul winning opening 601. When the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is 80 or more (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 80% or more), the shooting intensity is high, and the shot game ball is fired to the right side of the game area. Is the case.

  When the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (that is, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 30% or more and less than 80%), although the launched game ball reaches the game area, This is a case where the shot is fired to the left of the game area without reaching (or difficult to reach) the right of the game area.

  Therefore, in the processing of S2003, when it is determined that the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: Yes), the firing command is set with the value of the operation amount storage area as 20 (S2003). S2004), and proceeds to the processing of S2006. Accordingly, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is the operation amount (30% to 80%) at which the shot game ball is fired to the left side of the game area, the operation amount is adjusted to 20%. The game ball is fired at the fired intensity (ie, the fired intensity that becomes a foul ball). Therefore, in the right-handed game state, the game ball is unnecessarily fired to the left side of the game area, and unintended winning can be prevented. Further, the game ball that has become a foul ball enters the foul winning opening 601 and is returned as a prize ball (one ball), so that unnecessary game balls are fired (launched to the left side of the game area). ), The game balls are not unnecessarily consumed.

  In the present control example, the firing intensity is adjusted to 20%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The firing intensity adjusted to be a foul ball and to enter the foul winning opening 601 may be appropriately changed. . In addition, since the firing intensity to be fired to the right side of the game area and the firing intensity to be a foul ball may vary depending on the configuration of the game board 13, for example, when the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is in the range of 40 to 70 Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the emission intensity is adjusted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2003 that the value of the manipulated variable storage area 203s is not in the range of 30 to 80 (S2003: No), the firing intensity is weak, and the fired game ball does not reach the game area, and When the ball enters the winning opening 601, or when the launching intensity is high and the launched game ball is launched to the right of the game area, the value of the operation amount storage area 203s is set to execute the normal launch control. Is set based on the command, and the process proceeds to S2006.

  When the processing of S2004 or S2005 is completed, the firing permission flag 203r is set to off (S2006), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in the right-handed game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is insufficient to fire the game ball to the right side of the game area (in this control example, the operation amount is Is equal to or less than 80%), the firing intensity is adjusted to the firing intensity at which the game ball to be fired becomes a foul ball (in the present control example, the firing intensity corresponding to the operation amount of 20%). This prevents the game ball from being fired to the left side of the game area due to a player's operation error or the like despite the right-handed game state, and the game ball is unnecessarily consumed or unintentionally won. Disadvantage, such as inviting the player, can be suppressed.

  Further, in a game state (for example, a right-hit state) in which a direction in which the game ball is fired is provided in the game area by providing a winning opening of one prize ball, the game ball is fired in a direction other than the specified direction. As long as the firing intensity is set, the firing control process may forcibly change the firing intensity to the firing intensity at which the winning ball enters the winning opening of one ball. As described above, while the firing intensity is being corrected by the firing control process, the game guidance may be provided to the player so that the operation of the operation handle 51 may have the correct firing intensity. By doing so, the player can quickly operate the operation handle 51 so as to have an appropriate firing intensity.

  In the present control example, the main control device 110 is configured to adjust the firing intensity. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The firing control device 112 may adjust the firing intensity, or the payout control device 111 may adjust the firing intensity. You may do it. Thus, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present control example, in the case of the right-handed game state, the configuration is such that the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the left-handed game state, the firing intensity of the game ball is adjusted. In this manner, the game ball may be fired to the right side of the game area due to a player's operation error or the like, or the firing intensity adjusted according to the game state may be changed (for example, during a left-handed game. Adjusted to be left-handed and adjusted to right-handed during right-handed games).

  Further, in the present control example, the configuration is such that the firing intensity is adjusted according to the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the firing intensity may be adjusted according to the state of the ball firing unit 112a. Specifically, the sphere launching unit 112a is not ready to launch a sphere (such as a transient response of an electric element or a delay due to control processing). For example, even though the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 60%. If the game ball can only be fired at a firing intensity of 50%, the firing intensity is adjusted to 20% so that the ball becomes a foul ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being fired into the game area at a firing intensity not intended by the player, and to suppress disadvantages to the player such as unnecessary consumption of the game balls or unintentional winning. can do.

  Further, when a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot A) is given, the above-described adjustment of the emission intensity may be performed. Thereby, the variation of the privilege given by the jackpot can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Although the main controller 110 performs the output process based on various determination processes in each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, all the output information is output from the sound lamp controller 113 or the external output terminal board 261. When the determination process is performed by a device other than the main control device 110, all information based on the determination result is output to the sound lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261. It is configured to be possible. The output information can be notified to the outside so as to be identifiable. As means for performing the notification, various devices (LCD, speaker, etc.) connected to the sound lamp control device 113 or directly to the main control device 110 can be used. There are display units and the like that are connected.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  All or some of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined and configured. In addition, although the main control device 110 and the sub-control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 are configured, the present invention is not limited thereto, and all functions may be integrated into the main control device 110.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Fahl ball winning)
A game area in which the game ball can flow down, a launching means for firing the game ball toward the game area, and a path capable of guiding the launch ball fired by the launching means to the game area. A launch path, guiding means for guiding a game ball of the launch sphere flowing backward through the launch path without reaching the game area from the launch path to a specific area, and a game guided to the specific area A specific ball entry means capable of entering a ball, and an assigning means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time a game ball enters the specific ball entry means A gaming machine A1 characterized by the following.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a launching device for launching a game ball to a game area, and a game ball (a so-called foul ball) that has not reached the game area among the game balls fired by the firing means. Ball recovery device for recovering the ball). There is known a gaming machine in which a game ball collected by the ball collection device flows down a ball path provided in the game machine and is returned to a player again (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-308730). In this case, it is necessary to separately provide a ball path for returning the foul ball to the player, and a space for providing a dedicated ball path for returning the foul ball to the player is limited to a limited space in the gaming machine. There is a problem in that the inside of the gaming machine becomes complicated to secure it. In addition, there is a problem that the manufacturing cost increases.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path without reaching the game area is made to enter the specific ball entry means, and a game value equivalent to at least the one ball is entered based on the entered ball. Since it is possible to provide the ball to the player, it is not necessary to separately provide a ball path for returning the foul ball to the player in the gaming machine, and the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified. Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing a dedicated ball path for returning the foul ball to the player in the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine A1, the guiding means has a guiding piece that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the specific area and a second state in which guiding of the gaming ball to the specific area is controlled. Is always arranged on the firing path in the first state, and can be changed to the second state by abutting a game ball fired from the firing means to the game area. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, when the game ball fired from the firing means to the game area comes into contact with the guidance means, the guidance means is changed to the second state in which the guidance to the specific area is regulated. A situation in which the launched game ball is guided to a specific area can be prevented. Therefore, there is an effect that a foul ball can be guided to a specific area without hindering a normal game.

  In the gaming machine A2, a specific opening communicating with the specific region is formed in the firing path, and the guide piece is arranged at a position for guiding the game ball flowing back to the specific opening in the second state. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being executed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the guidance means is in the second state of restricting a game ball fired from the firing means to the game area from being guided to the specific area. Also, there is an effect that the foul sphere can be guided to a specific area.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, storage means having a storage portion capable of storing game balls to be supplied to the launch means, and supply means capable of supplying game balls from the storage means to the launch means. The gaming machine A4, wherein the giving means pays out one or more game balls to the storage means as the game value.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, it is possible to use a mechanism for paying out game balls based on entering a winning hole, which is conventionally provided in a gaming machine, and has an effect that the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified. In addition, since the shooting ball can be fired again without touching the provided game ball, there is an effect that the player does not feel troublesome.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the providing means pays out one game ball each time one game ball enters the specific entering means. .

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, one game ball is paid out each time one game ball enters the specific ball entry means, so that the player feels uncomfortable. Has the effect that it can be prevented from being given.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine has a payout channel through which the game ball paid out by the providing means flows down, and the payout channel pays out based on the ball entering the specific ball inputting means. A first flow path through which the discharged game balls flow, and at least a second flow path that guides the flowing game balls to the storage means differently from the first flow path, wherein the first flow path A gaming machine A6 formed to guide a game ball to the launching means without passing through the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, there is an effect that the game ball provided by the specific ball entry means can be immediately fired.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes a game board having the game area, and a frame configured to be detachable from the game board, and the launching unit is disposed on the frame, The gaming machine A7, wherein the specific area is formed on the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved in any of the gaming machines A1 to A6. That is, the foul ball generated on the game board side enters the specific ball entry means in the specific area provided on the game board, and the game ball provided by the providing means is fired by the firing means. Therefore, there is no need to provide a return path for foul balls that straddles the game board and the frame as in the related art, and there is an effect that the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine A7, the storage means, at least a part of the providing means, the first flow path, and the second flow path are arranged in the frame. Gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7. That is, it is possible to complete the path within the frame until the game ball provided by the providing means is fired by the firing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the structure in the gaming machine can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the launching path is formed by a wall that is formed in an arc shape and faces each other with a width that allows a game ball to pass therethrough. Of the part, the game ball is fired to the game area along the outer peripheral wall portion, and the guiding means is configured to cause the game ball flowing backward along the firing path along the inner circumferential side to the specific area. A gaming machine A9 characterized in that the gaming machine A9 is directed to the game machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, there is an effect that a collision between a foul ball and a gaming ball fired by the firing means can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine A9, the gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the wall portion is such that the inner peripheral wall portion is formed shorter than the outer peripheral wall portion.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that the foul ball can be efficiently guided to the specific area.

  In the gaming machine A1, the launching path is configured to have a depth that allows two game balls to pass in the front-rear direction of the game ball, and the launching unit launches the game ball into the game area. A game machine A11 that shoots a game ball along a path that allows one ball to pass through to the depth side.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, there is an effect that a collision between a foul ball and a gaming ball fired by the firing means can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine A11, the launching means is capable of launching with a launching force at which the game ball can reach the game area along a path through which one game ball can pass to the depth side. A gaming machine A12 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A11, there is an effect that the game ball can be fired so that the foul ball does not collide with the game ball fired by the firing means.

<Characteristic B group> (Detecting the passage of a game ball to determine an abnormality)
A game area in which game balls can flow down, a firing means capable of firing game balls toward the game area, and a firing path having a path capable of guiding a fire ball fired by the fire means to the game area; First detecting means capable of detecting the shooting sphere, second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball of the shooting sphere flowing backward through the firing path before reaching the game area, and the first detection Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result of the means and the detection result of the second detecting means; and output means for outputting information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition by the determining means. A gaming machine B1.

  Here, conventionally, a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. Is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game in which a privilege is obtained in an amount equal to or greater than the number of game balls fired by the firing device is performed.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the launch ball and the foul ball are detected, and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result, information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be monitored that the illegal game has been performed based on the output information.

  In the gaming machine B1, the predetermined condition is that the second detecting means has detected a gaming ball, even though the first detecting means has not detected a gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor a fraudulent game in which a foul ball is detected even though a gaming ball has not been fired.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the game machine B1 or B2 is provided with a time measuring means capable of measuring a predetermined time, and time measuring start means for starting the time measurement by the time measuring means, wherein the determining means performs the predetermined time after the time measurement is started by the time measuring start means. A game machine B3 for determining that the predetermined condition is satisfied during the game.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2. In other words, the determination can be made in consideration of the time difference between the timing at which the game ball fired by the firing means is detected and the timing at which the game ball is detected as a foul ball. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B3, the timing start means starts timing when the second detecting means detects a game ball, and the predetermined condition is a predetermined time period measured by the timing means. A gaming machine B4 wherein the second detecting means detects a game ball.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B3, there is no need to perform the normal clock operation, and there is an effect that unnecessary processing can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, among the game balls fired by the shooting means, the game balls that flow backward in the shooting path before reaching the game area are guided from the shooting path to a specific area. A gaming machine B5 comprising a guiding unit, wherein the second detecting unit is provided in the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, there is an effect that only the foul ball can be reliably detected.

  The gaming machine B5, further comprising a branch port for branching a game ball from the launch path to the specific area, wherein the first detection means is provided immediately before the branch port on the launch path. Machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B5. That is, the foul sphere generated in the firing path passes through the branching opening and is guided to a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the first detecting means does not detect the game ball flowing backward in the firing path, and can surely detect the game ball fired by the firing means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B6, the second detection unit detects a ball entering a specific ball entry unit in which a game ball that has flowed back on the launch path before reaching the game area can enter the ball before reaching the game area. A gaming machine B7 for detecting, provided each time a gaming ball is detected by the second detecting means, an imparting means for imparting a game value equivalent to at least one ball.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, there is an effect that the second detecting means can be shared with the means for detecting the entry into the specific entering means.

<Characteristic C group> (Abnormal monitoring by counting foul balls)
A launch path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, launching means capable of firing game balls in the play area, and a path capable of guiding launch balls fired by the launch means to the play area. Detecting means for detecting, among the launched balls, gaming balls flowing backward in the firing path before reaching the game area; and counting means for counting the backward flowing gaming balls based on the detection result of the detecting means. A gaming machine C1 comprising: and output means for outputting information based on the fact that the counting result by the counting means within a predetermined period has become the predetermined counting result.

  Here, conventionally, a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. Is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, there has been a problem that an illegal game in which a privilege is obtained in an amount equal to or greater than the number of game balls fired by the firing device is performed.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the following effects are obtained. That is, it is possible to count the foul balls and output information based on the fact that the count result is a predetermined count result. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be monitored that the illegal game has been performed based on the output information.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the counting result by the counting means becomes a first counting result which is predetermined as the predetermined counting result, the first counting result is obtained without waiting for the elapse of the predetermined period. A gaming machine C2 for outputting information based on the fact that the game machine has become a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the count result becomes the first count result, information can be output immediately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to immediately grasp that the illegal game is being played.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the second counting result in which the counting result by the counting means within the predetermined period is smaller than the first counting result predetermined as the predetermined counting result A game machine C3 for outputting information based on the result of the second counting when it becomes.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, there is an effect that both a short-term illegal game and a long-term illegal game can be monitored.

  Any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a launching ball detecting unit capable of detecting a launching ball fired by the launching unit, and a launching ball counting unit counting the launching ball based on a detection result of the launching ball detecting unit. Wherein the output means outputs information based on the fact that the counting result by the counting means within a predetermined time period is greater than the counting result by the shooting sphere counting means. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, it is possible to compare the result of counting the foul balls counted within the predetermined period with the result of counting the game balls fired by the firing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C4, the game machine C4 further includes a correction number calculation unit that calculates a correction number obtained by adding a predetermined number to the result of the counting by the number of shot spheres, and the output unit outputs the result of the counting by the counting unit within a predetermined period. A gaming machine C5 for outputting information based on an increase in the number of corrections.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4. That is, even if a foul sphere that has passed through the launching ball detection means but has not passed through the detection means has occurred, a correction is performed by adding a predetermined number as an allowable error range so as not to be judged as abnormal. Can be. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.

<Characteristic D group> (Structure measures for incoming ball security)
A launch path having a game area in which game balls can flow down, firing means capable of firing game balls in the game area, and a path capable of guiding the game balls fired by the fire means to the game area. An opening through which a game ball that has not reached the game area provided on the launch path and that has flowed back through the launch path can enter, and a game ball into which the game ball entered the opening can enter Means, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entry means, an assigning means for assigning a game value equivalent to the entered game ball to the player, and directing the firing path from below the opening. A gaming machine D1 having a protruding piece that protrudes.

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area, and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, in order to obtain a privilege equal to or greater than the number of game balls fired by the firing device, an illegal game is performed in which a game ball with a thread is manipulated to detect a plurality of entering balls. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine D1, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal game to be played by the protruding piece with which the thread attached to the game ball comes into contact.

  In the gaming machine D1, the projecting piece has a substantially opening width of the opening, and is arranged so as to protrude to a position facing the opening.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, there is an effect that the thread can be reliably brought into contact.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the protruding piece is formed of an elastic body, and when receiving the reversing game ball, receives the reversing game ball and guides the game ball to the opening. A gaming machine D3, which is elastically deformed in the opposite direction based on the fact that an external force greater than that received from the counterflowing gaming ball is received in the direction opposite to the firing direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, since the protruding piece with which the thread-like body abuts is elastically deformed, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for an illegal game to be performed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a gaming machine D4 is provided with a cutting means having a predetermined cutting force at least at a distal end of the projecting piece.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, there is an effect that an illegal game can be prevented by enabling the cutting means to cut the thread.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the game machine has a guide flow path which is communicated with the opening and guides the game ball entered from the opening to the ball entry means to the ball entry means. A gaming machine D5, wherein a protruding portion protruding from the opening side is formed in the game machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult for an illegal game to be performed by providing a plurality of portions where the thread comes into contact.

  In the gaming machine D5, the ball entry means is arranged such that the protruding portion is located above a ball entry portion where the game ball enters.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D5, there is an effect that a portion where the thread-shaped body can be reliably brought into contact can be provided.

  In the gaming machine D5 or D6, a specific cutting unit having a cutting force is provided at one end of the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5 or D6, there is an effect that the illegal cutting can be prevented by enabling the thread to be cut by the specific cutting means.

  In the gaming machine D3, the elastic body detects that the game ball passes through the firing path based on that an external force greater than that received from the counter-flowed game ball is received in a direction opposite to a firing direction of the game ball. A gaming machine D8 that is elastically deformed to a regulating position to regulate.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. In other words, even if there is a player who is performing an illegal game while playing a normal game so that it is not found that the illegal play is being performed, the projecting piece is elastically deformed so as to close the firing path by operating the thread. Therefore, the game ball fired by the firing means does not normally reach the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is difficult to simultaneously perform the illegal game and the normal game.

<Characteristic E group> (monitoring the failure of the launch device)
A game area in which the game ball can flow down, the firing intensity is variable, and a firing means capable of causing the game ball to reach the game area when fired at a predetermined firing intensity, and Launch instruction means for instructing to launch at an arbitrary launch intensity; a launch path having a path capable of guiding a game ball launched by the launch means to the game area; and Of the game balls fired by the specific ball input means capable of entering a game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path before reaching the game area, and an instruction that is equal to or higher than the predetermined firing intensity by the firing instruction means. A game machine E1 comprising: abnormality processing execution means for executing abnormality processing when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a ball entering the specific ball entry means when the game is performed.

  Here, a gaming machine that drops a game ball fired by the launching device in the game area and grants a privilege to the player based on the fact that the game ball enters a winning opening provided in the game area is provided. It is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). In such a gaming machine, if a failure occurs in the launching device, the player cannot launch the gaming machine at a desired position, and there is a possibility that the privilege is not given.

  According to the gaming machine E1, when a condition based on entering a specific ball entry means capable of entering a foul ball is satisfied, even though a launch instruction is issued at a launch intensity reaching the game area, Abnormal processing can be made executable. Therefore, there is an effect that a malfunction of the launching means can be monitored.

  In the gaming machine E1, an operating means operable by a player and variable control means for varying the firing intensity specified by the firing instruction means based on an operation amount of the operating means are provided. Gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, there is an effect that a failure of the launching unit can be monitored also in a gaming machine provided with the operation unit and the variable control unit.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, counting means for counting the number of game balls hit by the specific hitting means, and judging means for judging whether or not the counting means has counted a predetermined number or more of balls in a predetermined period. The gaming machine E3, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of incoming balls equal to or more than the predetermined number is counted by the determination unit.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, it is conceivable that a game ball fired by the firing means accidentally enters the specific ball-entering means due to a factor other than a malfunction of the firing means. However, if a failure occurs in the launching means, that state is continued. Therefore, by executing the abnormality process when the number of incoming balls equal to or more than the predetermined number is counted, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring the failure of the firing means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, determining means for determining whether or not the firing intensity indicated by the variable control means has been changed, and until a predetermined period has elapsed based on the determination made by the determining means as being changed. A game machine E4 having a regulation means for regulating the execution of the abnormal processing.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2 or E3. That is, immediately after the shooting intensity is changed by a sudden operation, game balls having different speeds pass through the shooting path, and thus the shot game balls may collide. That is, even if the launching means is normal, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the launch specific entering means. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the abnormal processing until a predetermined period elapses after the emission intensity is changed, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring the failure of the emission means can be improved.

  The gaming machine E5 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, wherein the abnormality processing executing means executes, as the abnormality processing, a process of outputting an abnormality signal indicating an abnormality to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, there is an effect that an abnormal signal relating to a malfunction of the launching device can be output to the outside.

  The gaming machine E6 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, wherein the abnormality processing executing means reports, as the abnormality processing, a notification mode indicating an abnormality.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, there is an effect that a failure in launching and sending can be notified to the outside.

  Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E6, having game value giving means for giving a game value equivalent to one game ball to a player based on a game ball having entered the specific ball entry means. A gaming machine E7, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects can be achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6. That is, a game value can be provided by using a specific ball entry means used for detecting a malfunction of the launching device. Therefore, there is an effect that means for detecting a game ball can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the abnormality processing execution means executes the abnormality processing when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means when an operation amount of the operation means is equal to or more than a predetermined operation amount. A gaming machine E8,

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, there is an effect that it is possible to monitor a failure of the launching unit under specific conditions.

  A determination unit that determines that the game machine is in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in any of the gaming machines E5 to E8, wherein the abnormality processing execution unit performs the abnormality processing based on a determination result of the determination unit A gaming machine E9 characterized by different contents.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E8, the content of the abnormal process can be varied depending on the gaming state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to raise the priority of the abnormal signal during the jackpot.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination unit continuously determines that the predetermined number or more of the incoming balls have been counted. Gaming machine E10.

  According to the gaming machine E10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines E3 to E9. In other words, if a failure occurs in the launching means, the state continues unless the firing means is repaired, and therefore, the determination is made continuously by the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of monitoring the malfunction of the firing means can be improved.

<Feature F group> (Replay when a game ball is fired to an unintended position)
A game area in which the game ball can flow down, a firing means capable of firing the game ball toward the game area, the firing intensity being variable according to the supplied electric energy, and a first operation based on a predetermined operation. Launch instructing means for instructing to launch at the launch intensity of the first launch intensity when the supplied amount of power is less than the amount of power required to launch at the first launch intensity Launch intensity correcting means for correcting the firing intensity to a lower than the lower second firing intensity, and launching a game ball at the second firing intensity or less corrected by the firing intensity correcting means. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a specific ball entry means; and an assigning means for giving a game value equivalent to at least one ball each time a game ball enters the specific ball entry means. .

  Here, there has been known a gaming machine having a game property of adjusting the firing intensity of the firing device and aiming at a predetermined position in the game area when a specific state (big hit state) is reached (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627). No.). In such a gaming machine, if a game ball is fired at a place other than a predetermined position during the above-described specific state, the game ball is merely consumed wastefully, and such a game ball is fired by the player. Was dissatisfied.

  According to the gaming machine F1, if the game ball cannot be fired at the firing intensity specified by the firing instruction means, the shooting intensity is corrected to a lower firing intensity, and the game ball is fired at the corrected firing intensity. Become. Then, a game value equivalent to the fired game ball is given, so that the game ball is not consumed unnecessarily. Therefore, there is an effect that the dissatisfaction of the player can be eliminated.

  In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball entry means is provided in a guiding portion in which, out of the shot balls fired by the shooting means, game balls that have flowed back in the shooting path without reaching the game area are guided, The gaming machine F2, wherein the second firing intensity is lower than the firing intensity required for the shooting sphere to reach the game area.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, the game ball fired with the corrected firing intensity enters the specific ball entry means without reaching the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game value equivalent to the shot waste ball can be reliably given to the player without affecting the game in the game area.

  In the gaming machine F1, the specific ball entry means is provided in a specific area of the game area where game balls fired at the first firing intensity are difficult to enter, and the second firing intensity is A gaming machine F3, wherein the launching sphere is stronger than the launching intensity required to reach the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, a game ball fired with the corrected firing intensity can enter a specific ball entry means provided in the game area. Therefore, there is an effect that a game value equivalent to the useless ball shot using the ball entry means provided in the game area can be given to the player.

  The gaming machine F2 further includes an abnormality determining unit that determines an abnormality based on a ball entering the specific ball entry unit, and the specific ball entry unit while the firing intensity is being corrected by the firing intensity correction unit. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that entering the ball is excluded from the determination of the abnormality.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the result of intentionally entering the specific entrance is excluded from the determination by the abnormality determining means, so that the accuracy of the abnormality determining means is improved. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the firing unit includes an operation unit capable of changing a firing intensity to a first firing intensity by performing a pressing operation, and the predetermined operation includes operating the operation unit. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the supply of the required amount of electric power to the launching means is performed in response to the operation of the operation unit whose emission intensity changes by a simple operation. There is an effect that it is possible to cope with a situation in which it is not in time.

  A gaming machine F6 comprising output means for outputting information based on the fact that the emission intensity correction means corrects the emission intensity in any of the gaming machines F1 to F5.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, by outputting information based on the fact that the shooting is being performed with the corrected intensity, for example, the player can grasp. Is displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused.

  The gaming machine F7, further comprising: a notifying unit that gives a notification in a manner recognizable by a player based on the information output by the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F6, since the player can recognize that the shooting is being performed with the corrected intensity, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is confused. This has the effect.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, specific entry information based on the entry of a game ball into the specific entry unit, and entry based on the entry of a game ball into the entry unit provided in the game area A gaming machine F8 comprising external output means capable of outputting information to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7. That is, by outputting the incoming ball information and the specific incoming ball information, respectively, the information receiving side obtains the incoming ball information obtained as a result of the game and the incoming ball information obtained in the sense of returning the game ball to the player. And can be managed separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the situation of the gaming machine can be accurately determined.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display unit is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine which drops a game ball fired by a launching device in a game area, and provides a bonus to a player by allowing the game ball to enter a winning opening provided in the game area. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252627).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that an illegal game in which a privilege is obtained in an amount equal to or greater than the number of gaming balls fired by the firing device is performed.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of monitoring illegal games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a game area in which a game ball can flow down, a firing means capable of firing the game ball toward the game area, and a firing fired by the firing means. A firing path having a path capable of guiding a ball to the game area, first detection means capable of detecting the fired ball, and, among the fired balls, the fired path has flowed back before reaching the game area. A second detecting means capable of detecting a game ball, a determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a detection result of the first detecting means and a detection result of the second detecting means, and the predetermined condition is determined by the determining means. Output means for outputting information based on the establishment.
The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the predetermined condition is that the second detection unit performs a game even though the first detection unit does not detect a game ball. A ball is detected.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine includes a time-measuring means capable of measuring a predetermined time, and time-measurement starting means for starting time measurement by the time-measuring means. It is to judge that the predetermined condition has been satisfied within a predetermined time from the start of timing by the timing start means.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein the timing start unit starts timing when the second detection unit detects a game ball, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. Means that the second detecting means has detected a game ball during a predetermined time counted by the time measuring means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein, among the gaming balls fired by the firing means, the game device reverses the firing path before reaching the gaming area. Guiding means for guiding the game ball to the specific area from the launch path, and the second detecting means is provided in the specific area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects can be obtained. That is, among the shooting balls and the shooting balls, a game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path before reaching the game area is detected, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Information based on the fact can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be monitored that the illegal game has been performed based on the output information.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, in addition to the fact that the game ball is not fired, of the fired balls before reaching the game area. There is an effect that it is possible to monitor an illegal game in which a game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path is detected.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the determination is made in consideration of the time difference between the timing of detecting the shooting ball fired by the firing means and the timing of detecting the shooting ball as flowing backward through the shooting path before the shooting ball reaches the game area. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the monitoring accuracy of a fraudulent game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, there is no need to perform regular clock time, and there is an effect that unnecessary processing can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 4, there is an effect that only the foul ball can be reliably detected.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
61 inner rail (inner rail)
61a 1st inner rail (2nd inner rail part)
61b 2nd inner rail (1st inner rail part)
62 outer rail (outer rail part)
111 payout control device (providing means)
112a ball firing unit (firing means)
601 Fal Winner (Specific ball entry means)

Claims (5)

A game area where game balls can flow down,
Firing means capable of firing game balls toward the game area,
A firing path having a path capable of guiding a firing sphere fired by the firing means to the game area,
First detection means capable of detecting the shooting sphere,
A second detection unit that can detect a game ball that has flowed back through the firing path before reaching the game area,
Determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on a detection result of the first detection means and a detection result of the second detection means;
An output unit for outputting information based on a predetermined condition being satisfied by the determination unit.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the second detecting means detects a game ball, even though the first detecting means does not detect a game ball. . A timing means capable of timing a predetermined time;
Time-measuring start means for starting time measurement by the time-measuring means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the determining unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined time after the timing is started by the timing starting unit. The time-measurement start means starts time-measurement when the second detection means detects a game ball,
4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the predetermined condition is a condition in which the second detection unit detects a game ball during a predetermined time period measured by the clock unit. 5. Among the game balls fired by the firing means, a game ball that has flowed backward in the firing path before reaching the gaming area, and a guiding means for guiding the game ball from the firing path to a specific area,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the second detection means is provided in the specific area.

Images